Emerson FX35 2005 Owner`s manual

Foreword
Your INFINITI represents a new way of
thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior
craftsmanship with a simple, refined aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.
The result is a different notion of luxury
and beauty. The car itself is important, but
so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle
evokes in its driver, and the sense of satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI — from
the way it looks and drives to the high level
of dealer service.
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to
the fullest, we encourage you to read this
Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains
all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it
also provides important instructions and
safety information.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
can be found in your Owner’s literature
portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about
maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you take your
INFINITI to an authorized dealer. The
portfolio contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this
vehicle, the periodic maintenance required to keep the warranties in effect as
well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance
program.
Additionally, a separate Customer Care
and Lemon Law Information Booklet will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s
lemon law.
INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long as
you own your car. Should you have any
questions regarding your INFINITI or an
INFINITI dealer, please contact our Consumer Affairs department at:
In U.S. 1-800-662-6200
In Canada 1-800-361-4792
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and
your passengers!
O
O
O
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
O
Before driving your vehicle please read
your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will
ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in
the safe operation of your vehicle.
O
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and
never drive too fast for conditions.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate
child restraint systems. Preteen children
should be seated in the rear seat.
ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to all
occupants of the vehicle.
ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be
covered under INFINITI warranties.
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
This manual includes information for all
options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that
does not apply to your vehicle.
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the
right to change specifications or design at
any time without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the
procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To
avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed carefully.
SIC0697
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
If you see this symbol, it means Do not do
this or Do not let this happen.
BLUETOOTH is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc., U.S.A. and licenced to
Xanavi Informatics Corporation.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.
© 2005 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
TOKYO, JAPAN
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be
reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical and consumer information
9
Index
10
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
0 Illustrated table of contents
Exterior ............................................................ 0-2
Instrument panel .............................................. 0-3
Meters and gauges ........................................... 0-4
Engine compartment ......................................... 0-5
VQ35DE engine ........................................... 0-5
VK45DE engine ........................................... 0-6
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
EXTERIOR
1. Hood (Page 3-24)
2. Headlight
(P.2-21)
and
turn
signal
switch
3. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-21)
4. Windshield (P.8-21)
5. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P.2-43)
6. Power windows (P.2-41)
7. Recovery hook (P.6-16)
8. Fog light and switch (P.2-28)
9. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-35, 9-10)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
10. Mirrors (P.3-30)
11. Doors (P.3-3)
— Keys
— Door locks
— Remote keyless entry system
— Intelligent Key (if so equipped)
12. Lift gate (P.3-24)
13. Rear window wiper (P.8-23)
14. Rear combination light (P.8-33)
15. Fuel-filler door (P.3-26)
16. Child safety locks (P.3-5)
SSI0012A
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Z 05.11.14/S50-D/V5.0 X
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-31)
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal
switch (P.2-23)
3. Trip odometer reset knob (P.2-4)
4. Instrument brightness control switch
(P.2-25)
5. Headlight aiming control switch
(P.2-26)
6. Trip odometer select knob (P.2-4)
7. Steering switch for Audio (P.4-40)/
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) (P.4-41)
8. Security indicator light (P.2-18)
9. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)
10. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-37)
11. Cruise control main/set switch
(P.5-22) or Intelligent cruise control
switch (if so equipped) (P.5-24)
12. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P.2-21)
13. Ignition switch (P.3-14)
14. Center ventilator (P.4-20)
15. Display (P.4-4)/Navigation system (if
so equipped)*
16. Audio system (P.4-25)
17. Center multi-function control panel
(P.4-2)
18. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-37)
SSI0182
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Z 05.11.14/S50-D/V5.0 X
METERS AND GAUGES
19. Lane departure warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-30)
20. Hood release handle (P.3-24)
21. Fuse box (P.8-24)
22. SNOW mode switch (P.2-31)
23. Parking brake (P.5-18)
24. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
switch (P.2-31)
25. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel
switch (P.3-28)
26. Storage box and power outlet (P.2-33,
P.2-35)
27. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P.2-28)
28. Automatic transmission selector lever
(P.5-14)
29. Heated seat switch (P.2-29)
30. Clock (P.2-32)
31. Automatic climate control system
(P.4-21)
32. Glove box (P.2-36)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual. (if so equipped)
SIC2135
1. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)
2. Tachometer (P.2-4)
3. Speedometer (P.2-4)
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
(P.2-5)
5. Intelligent cruise control system display (if so equipped) (P.5-24)
6. Automatic transmission position indicator (P.5-14)
7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-4)
8. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
VQ35DE ENGINE
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-24)
2. Battery (P.8-17)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-11)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-16)
5. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-9)
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
(P.8-16)
7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-15)
8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)
9. Drive belts (P.8-19)
10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-11)
11. Air cleaner (P.8-20)
SDI1991
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
VK45DE ENGINE
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-24)
2. Battery (P.8-17)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-11)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-16)
5. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-9)
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
(P.8-16)
7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-15)
8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-9)
9. Drive belts (P.8-19)
10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-11)
11. Air cleaner (P.8-20)
SDI1987
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats................................................................ 1-2
Front power seat adjustment........................ 1-2
Rear seat adjustment................................... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment ........................... 1-6
Active head restraint (front seats)................. 1-7
Armrest ....................................................... 1-7
Seat belts ......................................................... 1-8
Precautions on seat belt usage .................... 1-8
Child safety ............................................... 1-11
Pregnant women ....................................... 1-12
Injured persons......................................... 1-12
Three-point type seat belt with retractor ..... 1-12
Rear center seat belt .................................. 1-15
Seat belt extenders.................................... 1-18
Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-18
Child restraints ............................................... 1-19
Precautions on child restraints................... 1-19
Child restraint installation on rear seat
outboard or center positions ...................... 1-21
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system .......................................
Top tether strap child restraint ...................
Child restraint installation on front
passenger seat..........................................
Booster seats .................................................
Precautions on booster seats .....................
Booster seat installation on rear seat
outboard or center positions ......................
Booster seat installation on front
passenger seat..........................................
Supplemental restraint system........................
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ......................................................
INFINITI advanced air bag system
(front seats)...............................................
Supplemental air bag warning labels..........
Supplemental air bag warning light............
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
1-26
1-27
1-29
1-32
1-32
1-35
1-36
1-37
1-37
1-43
1-51
1-52
SEATS
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
SSS0133B
WARNING
O
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and receive neck
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
O
For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.
O
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of
the vehicle.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
Operating tips
O The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.
O Do not operate the power support seat
for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for automatic drive positioner operation.
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0474
SSS0475
Forward and backward
Reclining
Seat lifter
1 forward or backward
Moving the switch j
will slide the seat forward or backward to
the desired position.
2 backward until
Move the recline switch j
the desired angle is obtained. To bring the
seatback forward again, move the switch
2 forward.
j
Push the front or rear end of the switch up
or down to adjust the height and angle of
the seat.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions on
seat belt usage” later in this section. The
seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
For the front passenger’s seat, only the
angle of the seat can be adjusted.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
B and fold the seatthe luggage room j
back.
5. When resetting the seat, be sure to install the head restraints.
WARNING
SSS0476
Lumbar support (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides lower
back support to the driver. Push the front
1 or back j
2 end of the switch to adjust
j
the seat lumbar area.
O
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
O
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
O
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
O
Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area, any
SSS0247
REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Folding
1. Store the center seat belts in the proper
position. (See “REAR CENTER SEAT
BELT” later in this section.)
2. Slide the front seat forward if necessary. (See “FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT” earlier in this section.)
3. Pull the seat belt to side.
4. After removing the tonneau cover (if so
equipped), pull the lever on the rear
A or pull the lever on both sides of
seat j
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
luggage is on the rear seat or any cup is
in the cup holder.
O
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if
they have been removed for any reason.
O
If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
O
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a
sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
O
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If
they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.
O
When returning the seatbacks, be sure to
attach the rear center seat belt connector.
O
Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt
connector except when folding down the
rear seat.
O
When attaching the rear center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.
O
If the rear center seat belt connector and
the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury
may result in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0248
Reclining
1 and position the
Pull the reclining lever j
2 . Release
seat back at the desired angle j
1 after positioning the
the reclining lever j
2 .
seat at the desired angle j
WARNING
O
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident,
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You could
also slide under the lap belt and receive
serious internal injuries.
O
For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.
O
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
SSS0125C
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
To raise the head restraint, just pull it up.
1 and push
To lower, push the lock knob j
the head restraint down.
SSS0287
Adjust the head restraints so the center is
level with the center of your ears.
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly
as they may provide significant protection
against injury in an accident. Do not remove
them. Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat.
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0508
ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front
seats)
WARNING
O
Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section.
Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.
O
Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.
O
Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint
helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and
helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it
is said that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision,
the head restraints return to their original
positions.
ARMREST
Front
SSS0596
Front
1 while sliding the armPush the button j
2 to the desired position.
rest j
To use the console box, see “Console box”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
Properly adjust the active head restraints
as described in the previous section.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat, your chances of
being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages
you and all of your passengers to buckle up
every time you drive, even if your seating
position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most states, provinces or territories require that seat belts be worn at all times
when a vehicle is being driven.
Rear
SSS0243
Rear
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0136A
WARNING
O
O
Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance
or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat
belt is not worn properly.
O
Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never
run the belt behind your back, under your
arm or across your neck. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
O
Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an
accident.
O
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
O
Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
O
Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
O
Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
O
If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON
with all doors closed and all seat belts
fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in
the system. Have the system checked by
an INFINITI dealer.
O
Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor. See
an INFINITI dealer.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0134A
O
Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components
should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
O
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after any collision by an
INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends
that all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision be replaced unless the
collision was minor and the belts show
no damage and continue to operate
properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be in-
SSS0016
spected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
O
All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child
restraints should be replaced if they are
damaged.
SSS0014
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government
traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be
sure to learn the best way to transport your
child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
O Rear facing child restraint
O Front facing child restraint
O Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be
placed in rear facing child restraints. Front
facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front facing child restraint.
system (air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection.
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them
properly. The shoulder belt may come too
close to the face or neck. The lap belt may
not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could
cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved
child restraints for infants and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in this
section.)
Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protection.
INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint
Infants
Infants up to at least one year old should
be placed in a rear facing child restraint.
INFINITI recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint which
fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Small children
Children that are over one year old and
weigh between 20 lb (9 kg) and 40 lb (18
kg) can be placed in a forward facing child
restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. INFINITI recommends that small children be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained
by the seat belts which are provided. The
seat belt may not fit properly if the child is
less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall
and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
INFINITI recommends that a child be
placed in a commercially available booster
seat if the shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits close to the face or neck or
if the lap portion of the seat belt goes
across the abdomen. The booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder
belt is properly positioned across the top,
middle portion of the shoulder and the lap
belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can
only be used in seating positions that have
a three-point type seat belt. The booster
seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a
label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Once the child has grown so the shoulder
belt is no longer on or near the face and
neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo areas
while the vehicle is moving. The child could
be seriously injured or killed in an accident
or sudden stop.
PREGNANT WOMEN
INFINITI recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug, and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist, and place the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest. Never
run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
Front seat
SSS0292
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH
RETRACTOR
WARNING
INJURED PERSONS
O
INFINITI recommends that injured persons
use seat belts, depending on the injury.
Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
O
Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident,
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Rear seat
SSS0293
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You could
also slide under the lap belt and receive
serious internal injuries.
O
For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
Front seat
SSS0290
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in
this section.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle until it clicks. (For additional information regarding the rear center
seat belt, see “Setting center seat
belt”.)
O The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion will permit the belt to
move, and allow you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
SSS0291A
Rear seat
O If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack. Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger and rear seat belts
have a locking mechanism for child re-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
straint installation. It is referred to as the
automatic locking mode.
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
When the locking mechanism is activated
the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from
the buckle and fully retracted. For additional information, see “Child restraints”
later in this section.
O grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly
forward. The retractor should lock and
restrict further belt movement.
The automatic locking mode should be
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by a passenger, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check or if you have any questions about
belt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.
SSS0326
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract.
Checking seat belt operation
Your seat belt retractors are designed to
lock belt movement using two separate
methods:
O when the belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
SSS0351
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(for front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for
you. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull the
A , and then move the
release button j
shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off
of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.
O
After adjustment, release the adjustment
button and try to move the shoulder belt
anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
O
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and
increase the chance or severity of injury
in an accident.
SSS0240
REAR CENTER SEAT BELT
The rear center seat belt has a connector
1 and a seat belt tongue j
2 . Both
tongue j
the connector tongue and the seat belt
tongue must be securely latched for proper
seat belt operation.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Stowing rear center seat belt
When folding down the rear seat, the rear
center seat belt can be retracted into a
stowed position as follows:
1 so that
1. Hold the connector tongue j
the seat belt does not retract suddenly
when the tongue is released from the
connector buckle.
A
2. Insert a suitable tool such as a key j
into the connector buckle and release
the connector tongue.
2 .
3. Fold the connector as illustrated j
SSS0241
4. Then secure the connector tongue into
3 in the ceiling.
the retractor base j
WARNING
O
Always fasten the connector tongue and
the seat belt in the order shown.
O
Always make sure both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt. Do not
use it with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a
sudden stop.
WARNING
SSS0249
O
Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt
connector except when folding down the
rear seat.
O
When attaching the rear center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Attaching rear center seat belt
If the rear center seat belt connector and
the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury
may result in an accident or sudden stop.
Always be sure the rear center seat belt
connector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding
down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
1 in the ceiling.
retractor base j
2. Pull the seat belt and secure the con2 .
nector buckle until it clicks j
The center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle are indicated by the “.” and “m”
mark.
The center seat belt connector tongue can
be attached only into the rear center seat
belt connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the
seat belt” earlier in this section.
WARNING
O
Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt
connector except when folding down the
rear seat.
SSS0250
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
O
When attaching the rear center seat belt
connector, be certain that the seatbacks
are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.
If the rear center seat belt connector and
the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury
may result in an accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
O
O
Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
O
Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a
sudden stop.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fit the lapshoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is
available. The extender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and
may be used for either the driver or front
passenger seating position. See an INFINITI dealer for assistance if the extender
is required.
Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should be
used with INFINITI seat belts.
O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
O Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire belt assembly should be replaced.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
O To clean the seat belt webbings, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution
recommended for cleaning upholstery
or carpets. Then brush the webbing,
wipe it with a cloth and allow it to dry in
the shade. Do not allow the seat belts
to retract until they are completely dry.
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHILD RESTRAINTS
SSS0099
SSS0269
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
WARNING
O
O
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure
to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.
Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
O
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child
restraint must only be used in the rear
seat.
O
INFINITI recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
O
An improperly installed child restraint
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
In general, child restraints are designed to
be installed with the lap portion of a
lap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these
lower anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
SYSTEM” later in this section.
Child restraints for infants and children of
various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
O choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
O
O check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
O if the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
child restraint and check the various
adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child.
Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and
weight. Always follow all recommended
procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in approved child restraints at all
times while the vehicle is being operated.
WARNING
O
Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of the
vehicle.
O
O
O
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a child restraint,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.
After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm). If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
O
If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation on front passenger
seat” later in this section for details.
O
When your child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case
of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child restraint.
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR
CENTER POSITIONS
WARNING
O
The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used when
installing a child restraint.
O
Failure to use the automatic locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured
and cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision.
O
When installing a child restraint system
in the rear center position both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle tongue must be secured. See “Attaching rear center seat belt” earlier in
this section.
Rear outboard seat
SSS0252A
Front facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear
outboard or center seat, follow these
steps:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The back of the
child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head
restraint is removed, store it in a
SSS0342
Rear center seat
secure place. Be sure to install the head
restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it
is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position
or a different child restraint.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0253E
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
SSS0254E
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts
back to emergency locking mode when
the belt is fully retracted.
SSS0332A
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
SSS0333
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and push it
forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to
another rear seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) will be
canceled.
Rear outboard seat
SSS0357
Rear facing
When you install a child restraint in a rear
outboard or center seat, follow these
steps:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Rear center seat
SSS0358
SSS0335
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
SSS0258A
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts
back to emergency locking mode when
the belt is fully retracted.
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
SSS0259A
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the
belt.
SSS0260A
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is allowed to wind back into the
retractor, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to
another rear seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
back. A label is attached to the seatback to
help you locate the LATCH system anchors.
WARNING
O
Attach LATCH system compatible child
restraints only at the locations shown. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
O
Do not secure a child restraint in the rear
center seating position using the LATCH
system anchors. The child restraint will
not be secured properly.
SSS0613
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND
TETHERS FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
1 LATCH lower anchor points (right)
j
2 LATCH lower anchor points (left)
j
3 LATCH label
j
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) anchor points are located in the
seat cushions of the rear outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a
child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH anchors.
The LATCH system anchors are located at
the rear of the seat cushion near the seat-
O
The LATCH system anchors are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstance are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
Some child restraints include two rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be
connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This
system is known as the LATCH system. This
system may also be referred to as the
ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With
this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH
system compatible child restraints. Check
your child restraint for a label stating that it
is compatible with the LATCH system. This
information may also be in the instructions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the rear seating
positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child
restraint.
Some child restraints may also require the
use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether
strap child restraint” later in this section
for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments in the rear seat, follow these
steps.
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
fingers into the lower anchor area and
feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured
properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed.
1. To install the LATCH system compatible
child restraint, insert the child restraint
LATCH system anchor attachments into
the anchor points on the seat.
To assist in attaching the child restraint
to the lower anchors, recline the seatback, latch the anchor attachments to
the anchors, and then return the seatback to its normal, locked position. If
the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether, see “Top tether strap child
restraint” later in this section for installation instructions.
side and tug it forward to make sure
that the child restraint is securely held
in place. It should not move more than
1 inch (25 mm).
3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use.
SSS0359
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
WARNING
O
Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
2. After attaching the child restraint and
before placing the child in it, use force
to push the child restraint from side to
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Z 05.11.14/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
After removing a rear seat head restraint
for top tether installation, store it securely to prevent it from causing injury to
passengers or damage to the vehicle in
case of sudden braking or an accident.
Always replace it and adjust properly
when top tether is no longer in use.
If your child restraint has a top tether
strap, it must be secured to the anchor
point provided behind its position.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint installation instructions in this section and the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the ceiling
above the luggage room.
If you have any questions when installing
a top strap child restraint on the rear seat,
consult an INFINITI dealer for details.
First, adjust the seatback so that it is upright. Then secure the child restraint with
the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable. Remove
the anchor cover from the anchor point as
illustrated. Keep the removed cover in a secure place to prevent loss or damage.
Remove the head restraint from the seatback. Store it in a secure place. Position
the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and secure it to the tether anchor
bracket that provides the straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instruction to remove
any slack.
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0300A
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
WARNING
O
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great
force. A rear-facing child restraint could
be struck by the supplemental front air
bag in a crash and could seriously injure
or kill your child.
O
INFINITI recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the
rearmost position. Also, be sure the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated to indicate the passenger air bag
is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section for details.
O
A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat.
O
The passenger three-point seat belt is
equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
O
Failure to use the automatic locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured
and cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision. Also, it can change the
operation of the front passenger air bag.
See “Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier
in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position
does not have an adjustable head restraint
and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a
different child restraint.
SSS0301B
Front facing
If you must install a child restraint in the
front seat, follow these steps:
1. Position the child restraint on the front
passenger seat. It should be placed in
a front facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Adjust
the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the
rear facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
SSS0360
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0361
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts
back to emergency locking mode when
the belt is fully retracted.
SSS0331A
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
SSS0302C
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). Before placing the
child in the child restraint, use force to
tilt the child restraint from side to side,
and tug it forward to make sure that it is
securely held in place. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it
does move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If un-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
BOOSTER SEATS
able to properly secure the restraint,
move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the belt is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the lap belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is
not illuminated, see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this
section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) will be
canceled.
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
O
A booster seat must only be installed in a
seating position that has a lap/shoulder
belt. Failure to use a three-point type
seat belt with a booster seat can result in
a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.
O
An improperly installed booster seat
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
WARNING
O
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint or booster seat while riding in the
vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or
booster seat can result in serious injury
or death.
O
Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
O
INFINITI recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
LRS0455
WARNING
Do not use towels, books, pillows or other
items in place of a booster seat. Items such
as these may move during normal driving or
a collision and result in serious injury or
death. Booster seats are designed to be used
with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are
designed to properly route the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt over the
strongest portions of a child’s body to pro-
LRS0453
vide the maximum protection during a
collision.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
O Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
LRS0464
O Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
O Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or
above the center of the child’s ears. For
1
example, if a low back booster seat j
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s
ears. If the seatback is lower than the
center of the child’s ears, a high back
2 should be used.
booster seat j
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with your child. Always
follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
O
O
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.
O
After placing the child in the booster seat
and fastening the seat belt, make sure
the shoulder portion of the belt is away
from the child’s face and neck and the
lap portion of the belt does not cross the
abdomen.
O
Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation on
front passenger seat” later in this section.
O
When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case
of a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING
O
Improper use of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of the
vehicle.
O
Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat, be
sure to select one which will fit your child
and vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of booster
seats in your vehicle.
If the booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your
child in the booster seat.
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
is interfering with the proper booster
seat fit, try another seating position or
a different booster seat.
3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.
Outboard position
LRS0452
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
REAR SEAT OUTBOARD OR CENTER
POSITIONS
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automatic
locking mode when using a booster seat with
the seat belts. When you install a booster
seat in the rear seat, follow these steps:
LRS0451
Center position
1. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
2. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster
seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head
restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take up
extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the belt
routing.
5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt
with retractor” earlier in this section.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section for details.
If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, follow these steps:
1. Move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
LRS0454
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
WARNING
INFINITI recommends that child restraints
be installed in the rear seat. However, if you
must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the
rearmost position. Also, be sure the front
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
to indicate the passenger air bag is OFF. See
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster
seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head
restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it
is interfering with the proper booster
seat fit, try another seating position or
a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take up
extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the belt
routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt
with retractor” earlier in this section.
7. When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, the passenger air bag
status light
may or may not be
illuminated, depending on the size of
the child and the type of booster seat
being used. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section.
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information
concerning the driver and passenger front
impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI
advanced air bag system), front seat sideimpact supplemental air bags, curtain
side-impact and rollover air bags and front
seat pre-tensioner seat belts.
Supplemental front impact air bag system:
The INFINITI advanced air bag system can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Supplemental side-impact air bag system:
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact and rollover air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. In a rollover both cur-
tain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger
seat belts and are not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on
seat belt usage.)
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the systems are
operational.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front
air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always use the seat belts.
O
The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt usage
then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
O
The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
See “Front Passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
SSS0131B
WARNING
O
O
The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light
is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section.
O
The seat belts and the supplemental
front air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
great force. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
SSS0132B
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0006
SSS0008
SSS0099
SSS0007
SSS0009
SSS0100
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O
Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your
lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the
previous illustrations.
O
Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain sideimpact and rollover air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
O
Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag
System, never install a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child
restraints” earlier in this section for details.
SSS0059A
WARNING
O
Supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact and rollover air bag:
O
SSS0188A
The supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
frontal impact, rear impact or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
The seat belts, the supplemental side air
bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are most effective when you
are sitting well back and upright in the
seat. The side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag inflate with great force. Do
not allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the side
of the seatback of the front seat or near
the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear outboard
seats to extend their hand out of the
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0140
window or lean against the door. Some
examples of dangerous riding positions
are shown in the illustrations.
O
SSS0159
O
Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supple
mental side air bag inflation.
When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If the
side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with
children, who should always be properly
restrained.
1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSS0162
The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel.
The front passenger supplemental front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel
above the glove box. The supplemental
front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although
they may inflate if the forces in another
type of collision are similar to those of a
higher severity frontal impact. They may
not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental air bag
system operation.
SSS0597
1. Crash zone sensor
9. Satellite sensors
2. Supplemental curtain side-impact and
rollover air bags
10. Supplemental curtain side-impact and
rollover air bag modules
3. Occupant classification system control
unit
INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG
SYSTEM (front seats)
4. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor)
This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI
advanced air bag system for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted
in Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual still
apply and must be followed.
5. Supplemental side air bag modules
6. Supplemental front air bag modules
7. Diagnosis sensor unit
8. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
The INFINITI advanced air bag system has
dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt buckle
switches, occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt
tension sensor. Inflator operation is based
on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage of the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight
of an occupant or object on the seat and
seat belt tension. Based on information
from the sensors, only one front air bag
may inflate in a crash, depending on the
crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally,
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected
on the passenger seat and how the seat
belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off.). See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this
section for further details. One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, contact an INFINITI dealer. If
you are considering modifications of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also
contact an INFINITI dealer. Contact information is contained in the front of this
Owner’s Manual.
When a supplemental front air bag inflates,
a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care
should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
Supplemental front air bags, along with the
use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front
occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
front air bag may cause facial abrasions or
other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far
as practical away from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. The supplemental
front air bags inflate quickly in order to
help protect the front occupants. Because
of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against the
front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The supplemental front air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
all instructions in this manual concerning the
use of seats, seat belts and child restraints
can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Status light:
The front passenger air bag status light
is located on the map light cover.
The light operates as follows:
SSS0614
Front passenger air bag and status
light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn
how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat
belt and child restraints is necessary for
most effective protection. Failure to follow
O Unoccupied passenger seat: The
is OFF and the front passenger
air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a
crash.
O Passenger seat occupied by a small
adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The
illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
O Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in
this section: The light
is OFF to
indicate that the front passenger air
bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S.
regulations. If the front passenger air bag
is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The
driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically
turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to
meet the requirements.
One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the
bottom of the front passenger seat cushion
and is designed to detect an occupant and
objects on the seat by weight. It works together with seat belt sensors described
later. For example, if a child is in the front
passenger seat, the advanced air bag
system is designed to turn the passenger
air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type
specified in the regulations is on the seat,
its weight and the child’s weight can be de-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
tected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
The occupant classification sensor operation can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are
designed to detect if the seat belt is
buckled and the amount of tension on the
seat belt, such as when it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode).
Based on the weight on the seat detected
by the occupant classification sensor and
the belt tension detected on the seat belt,
the advanced air bag system determines
whether the front passenger air bag should
be automatically turned OFF as required by
the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it
may be turned OFF. However, if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or
by otherwise being out of position), this
could cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly
uses the seat belt in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode), this could
cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always
be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air
bag.
INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. INFINITI also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats
be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is
not possible, the occupant classification
sensor and seat belt sensors are designed
to operate as described above to turn the
front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restrains and to use the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode) may allow the
restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the
passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints”
earlier in this section for proper use and installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight
detected by the occupant classification
sensor. Other conditions could also result
in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are
on the seat, contrary to the instructions in
this manual. Always be sure that you and
all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light,
you can monitor when the front passenger
air bag is automatically turned OFF with the
seat occupied. The light will not illuminate
when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it
could be that the person is a small adult, or
is not sitting on the seat properly or is not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the passenger air bag status light
may or may not be illuminated, depending
on the size of the child and the type of child
restraint being used. If the passenger air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or
seat belt is not being used properly. In rare
cases, the passenger air bag status light
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
will not illuminate even though the air bag
is OFF.
Other supplemental front air bag
precautions
If such situations happen, properly position and restrain the occupant or child restraint. Otherwise reposition the occupant
or child restraint in a rear seat. If you have
any questions about whether your passenger air bag is working as designed, your
INFINITI dealer can confirm that it is working properly by using a special tool.
O
The air bag system and passenger air bag
status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status.
For example, if a large adult who is sitting
in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light
will change from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal
system operation and does not indicate a
malfunction.
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad or on the instrument panel.
Also, do not place any objects between
any occupant and the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental front air bag
inflates.
O
Immediately after inflation, several front
air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
supplemental air bag system. This is to
prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
O
Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-
WARNING
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the
meter and gauges area, will blink. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
sion system or front end structure. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental air bag system.
O
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and the
instrument panel assembly by placing
material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the
air bag system.
O
Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change
the front seats by placing material on the
seat cushion or by installing additional
trim material, such as seat covers, on the
seat. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or
the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor).
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
seat belt system. This may affect the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
O
Work on and around the supplemental
front air bag system should be done by
an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by
an INFINITI dealer. The Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air
bag system.
O
A cracked windshield should be replaced
immediately by a qualified repair facility.
A cracked windshield could affect the
function of the supplemental air bag system.
O
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer
to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
SSS0190
Supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag system
The supplemental side air bags are located
in the outside of the seatback of the front
seats. The supplemental curtain sideimpact and rollover air bags are located in
the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position
occupants. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual still
apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
impact and rollover air bags are designed
to inflate in higher severity side collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity side impact. They
are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags
are also designed to inflate in certain types
of rollover collisions or near rollovers. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental side air
bag and curtain side-impact and rollover
air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly
loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Supplemental side air bags, along with the
use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact and rollover air
bags help to cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side
air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the
lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and
the driver and passenger seated upright as
far as practical away from the side air bag.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as
far away as practical from the door finishers
and side roof rails. The side air bags and
curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in
order to help protect the front occupants
and rear-outboard occupants. Because of
this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain side-impact and rollover air bag
will remain inflated for a short time.
The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or START position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the systems are
operational.
WARNING
O
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place
any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the
front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if
the side air bag or curtain side-impact air
bag inflates.
O
Immediately after inflation, several side
air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
O
O
O
No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of this
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system. This is to prevent accidental
inflation of the side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system.
Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental
system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seat by placing material near the
seatback or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around the
side air bag.
Work around and on the side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag system
should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
Installation of electrical equipment
should also be done by an INFINITI
dealer. TheSRS wiring harnesses*should
not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the side air bag system.
*
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary,
replaced by an INFINITI dealer.
O
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of the
pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to
prevent accidental activation of the pretensioner seat belt or damage to the pretensioner seat belt operation. Tampering
with the pre-tensioner seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.
O
Work around and on the pre-tensioner
system should be done by an INFINITI
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an
INFINITI dealer. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pre-tensioner
seat belt system.
O
If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an
INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensioner
disposal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.
Incorrect disposal procedures could
causepersonal injury.
The SRS wiring harnesses connectors are
yellow for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag system and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For
front seats)
WARNING
O
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle as
a unit.
O
If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt
system activates in conjunction with the
front supplemental air bag systems.
Working with the seat belt retractor, it
helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of
collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner seat belt system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat
belt’s retractor. These seat belts are used
in the same way as conventional seat belts.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,
smoke is released and a loud noise may be
heard. The smoke is not harmful and does
not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
will not come on,
will flash intermittently or will turn on for 7
seconds and remain on after the ignition
switch has been turned to the ON or START
position. In this case, the pre-tensioner
seat belt may not function properly. They
must be checked and repaired. Take your
vehicle to an INFINITI dealer.
SSS0362
1 SRS air bag
j
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
2 SRS side-impact air bag
j
The warning label is located on the side of
the passenger’s side center pillar.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front air bag and supplemental side-impact
air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts
and all related wiring.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
SPA1097
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits of the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag
and curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt
systems. The circuits monitored by the air
bag warning light are the diagnosis sensor
unit, crash zone sensor, rollover sensors,
satellite sensors, front air bag modules,
side air bag modules, curtain side-impact
O The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
O The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
O The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the supplemental
front air bags, supplemental side air bags,
curtain side-impact air bags and/or pretensioner seat belt may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take
your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental front
air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat
belt system will not operate in an accident.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI
dealer as soon as possible.
Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis.
As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the
supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these
systems should be done only by an INFINITI dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the supplemental front air bags,
side air bags, curtain air bags, related
parts and pre-tensioner seat belt should be
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
pointed out to the person conducting the
maintenance. The ignition switch should
always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
O
Once a supplemental front air bag,
supplemental side air bag or curtain air
bag has inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be replaced.
Additionally, if any of the supplemental
front air bags inflate, the activated pretensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner seat belt system should be replaced by an INFINITI dealer. The air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belt
system cannot be repaired.
O
The supplemental front air bag, side air
bag and curtain side-impact/rollover air
bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt
system should be inspected by an
INFINITI dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
O
If you need to dispose of these supplemental systems or scrap the vehicle, contact an INFINITI dealer. Correct disposal
procedures are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect
disposal procedures could cause personal
injury.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel .............................................. 2-2
Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3
Speedometer and odometer......................... 2-4
Tachometer ................................................. 2-4
Engine coolant temperature gauge ............... 2-5
Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5
Compass display .............................................. 2-6
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders......................................................... 2-9
Checking bulbs............................................ 2-9
Warning lights ........................................... 2-10
Indicator lights ......................................... 2-15
Audible reminders ..................................... 2-17
Security systems ............................................ 2-18
Vehicle security system ............................. 2-18
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ........ 2-20
Windshield wiper and washer switch .............. 2-21
Rear window wiper and washer switch ............ 2-22
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch ............................................................ 2-23
Headlight and turn signal switch ..................... 2-23
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-23
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-24
Daytime running light system
(Canada only) ...........................................
Instrument brightness control ...................
Turn signal switch .....................................
Fog light switch .........................................
Hazard warning flasher switch.........................
Horn ...............................................................
Heated seats (if so equipped) ..........................
Lane departure warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) ..............................................
SNOW mode switch.........................................
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .........
Clock ..............................................................
Adjusting the time .....................................
Power outlet ...................................................
Storage ..........................................................
Sunglasses holder.....................................
Storage box...............................................
Cup holders...............................................
Glove box ..................................................
Console box ..............................................
Luggage floor boxes (if so equipped) ..........
Card holder (for driver’s side).....................
Cargo net (if so equipped) ..........................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-32
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-35
2-36
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-39
Tonneau cover (if so equipped) ..................
Windows ........................................................
Power windows .........................................
Sunroof (if so equipped)..................................
Automatic sunroof .....................................
Interior light ...................................................
Room light.................................................
Map light ..................................................
Ceiling light (if so equipped) ......................
Rear personal light ...................................
Luggage room light....................................
Vanity mirror light ...........................................
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-43
2-43
2-45
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-47
HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so
equipped).......................................................
Programming HomeLink ...........................
Programming HomeLink for Canadian
customers .................................................
Operating the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................................
Programming trouble-diagnosis .................
Clearing the programmed information ........
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
button.......................................................
If your vehicle is stolen..............................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-50
2-51
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SSI0182
1. Outside mirror remote control
2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal
switch
3. Trip odometer reset knob
4. Instrument brightness control switch
5. Headlight aiming control switch
6. Trip odometer select knob
7. Steering switch for Audio/Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped)
8. Security indicator light
9. Meters and gauges
10. Driver supplemental air bag
11. Cruise control main/set switch or Intelligent cruise control switch (if so
equipped)
12. Windshield wiper/washer switch
13. Ignition switch
14. Center ventilator
15. Display/Navigation system
(if so equipped)*
16. Audio system
17. Center multi-function control panel
18. Front passenger supplemental air bag
19. Lane departure warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped)
20. Hood release handle
21. Fuse box
22. SNOW mode switch
23. Parking brake
2-2 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
METERS AND GAUGES
24. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
switch
25. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel
switch
26. Storage box and power outlet
27. Hazard warning flasher switch
28. Automatic transmission selector lever
29. Heated seat switch
30. Clock
31. Automatic climate control system
32. Glove box
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual. (if so equipped)
SIC2135
1. Warning/Indicator lights
play (if so equipped)
2. Tachometer
3. Speedometer
6. Automatic transmission position indicator
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
7. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)
5. Intelligent cruise control system dis-
8. Fuel gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
1 records the total distance
The odometer j
the vehicle has been driven.
2 records the disThe twin trip odometer j
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display:
3 changes the disPushing the trip knob j
play as follows:
SIC2551
TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer:
TACHOMETER
4 to reset
Push and hold the reset knob j
the trip odometer to zero.
SIC2136
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed
(MPH and km/h).
Elapsed time, driving distance and average
speed information are also available. Refer
to “How to use “TRIP” button” in the “4.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section.
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
A .
Do not rev the engine into the red zone j
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
2-4 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
SIC2137A
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is normal
when the gauge indicates within the range
A .
j
The engine coolant temperature will vary
with the outside air temperature and
driving conditions.
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal
A , stop the vehicle as soon as safely
range j
possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously
damage the engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC3119
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning, acceleration, or going up
or down hill.
The gauge needle is designed to move to
the E (Empty) position when the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.
Instruments and controls 2-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
COMPASS DISPLAY
A comes on
The low fuel warning light j
when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the gauge reaches E. There will be a small
reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E.
A is pushed,
When the compass switch j
B will indicate the dithe compass display j
rection the vehicle is heading.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door
is located on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
S: south
N: north
E: east
W: west
If the display reads “C” or compass switch
A is pushed for 9 seconds (Type B), calij
CAUTION
O
O
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
may come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips, the
lamp
should turn off. If the lamp remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by an INFINITI dealer.
Type A
SIC3150
brate the compass by driving the vehicle in
3 complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8
km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route.
The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked 3 complete circles.
A again.
To turn off the compass, push j
For additional information, see “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” later in this
section.
2-6 Instruments and controls
Type B
SIC3014
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance.
In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to
set the variance for your particular location
if this happens:
1. Push the compass switch for more than
3 seconds. The current zone number
will appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance
number on the zone map.
3. Push and hold the compass switch until
the new zone number appears in the
display, then release the switch. After
you release the switch, the display will
show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction:
1. With the display turned on, push the
compass switch for 3 seconds, until a
zone selection number is displayed in
the mirror compass window.
SIC0611B
2. Push the compass switch repeatedly
(toggle) until the correct zone is displayed, then release the switch.
Instruments and controls 2-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
3. The display returns to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds after the
switch is released.
4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat
steps 1 thru 3. See map.
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
O If the compass deviates from the correct direction after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
O The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct
compass point when the vehicle moves
to an area where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)
CAUTION
O
Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
O
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
2-8 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD
models)
or
or
Anti-lock brake warning light
Intelligent Key warning light (if so
equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
indicator light (Orange; if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Automatic transmission check warning
light
Low fuel warning light
Preview Function warning light (Orange;
if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light
Brake warning light
Intelligent Cruise Control system MAIN
switch indicator light (Green; if so
equipped)
Intelligent Cruise Control system set
switch indicator light (if so equipped)
Low washer fluid warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Charge warning light
Seat belt warning light
Slip indicator light
Door open warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light
Snow mode indicator light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Automatic transmission position indicator
light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
P position selecting warning light and
chime (if so equipped)
Cruise main switch indicator light (Green)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light
Intelligent Cruise Control system warning
light (Orange; if so equipped)
Cruise set switch indicator light
CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
The following lights come on briefly and
then go off:
,
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
warning light (AWD models)
The AWD warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to ON. It turns off
soon after the engine is started.
If the AWD system malfunctions or the
revolution, or radius of the front and the
rear wheel are different, the warning light
will either remain illuminated or blink. See
“All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
CAUTION
O
O
If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked by an
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
If the AWD warning light blinks on when
you are driving:
- blinks rapidly (about twice a second):
Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle
the engine. The driving mode will
change to 2WD to prevent the AWD
system from malfunctioning.
If the warning light turns off, you can
drive again.
- blinks slowly (about once every 2 seconds):
Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle
the engine. Check that all tire sizes are
the same, tire pressure is correct and
tires are not worn.
If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as
soon as possible.
or
Anti-lock brake
warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the anti-lock brake warning
light will illuminate and then turn off. This
indicates the anti-lock brake system (ABS)
is operational.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
anti-lock function of the brake will cease
operation but the ordinary brakes will continue to operate. See “Anti-lock brake
system (ABS)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section for further details.
If the light comes on while you are driving,
contact an INFINITI dealer for repair.
Automatic transmission
check warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the automatic transmission
check warning light comes on and then
turns off. This indicates that the automatic
transmission system is operational.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running or while driving, it may indicate
that the automatic transmission system is
not functioning properly. Have an INFINITI
dealer check and repair the transmission.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake
system is not functioning properly. Have
the system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Preview Function warning
light (Orange: if so
equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction
in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function)
system.
or
O
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you judge
it to be safe, drive carefully to the
nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because
driving it could be dangerous.
O
Pressing the brake pedal with the engine
stopped and/or a low brake fluid level
may increase your stopping distance and
braking will require greater pedal effort
as well as pedal travel.
O
If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light:
The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If
the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied,
stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
:
WARNING
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
Anti-lock brake system warning indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the anti-lock brake
warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
anti-lock brake system is not functioning
properly. Have the brake system checked
by an INFINITI dealer. See “Anti-lock brake
warning light” earlier in this section.
Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not functioning properly. Turn
the engine off and check the alternator
belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or
if the light remains on, see an INFINITI
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator belt
is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
and/or lift gate are not closed securely
while the ignition switch is ON.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure.
If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call an
INFINITI dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See
“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious
damage to the engine almost immediately.
Such damage is not covered by warranty.
Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do
so.Ë
P position selecting warning
light and chime (if so
equipped)
The light blinks in red and warning buzzer
beeps when the selector lever is not in the
P position and you are out with the Intelligent Key.
When the warning light blinks, move the
selector lever to P position and return the
ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Intelligent Cruise Control
system warning light
(Orange; if so equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction
in the Intelligent Cruise Control system.
Intelligent Key warning light
(if so equipped)
This light comes on in green when it is possible to turn the ignition switch.
When the light comes on in red, it is not
possible to turn the knob.
O The warning light blinks in red when the
Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
with the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON position. Confirm the location of the
key as soon as possible when the warning light blinks in red.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you while driving the vehicle.
O The warning light goes off about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is
brought inside the vehicle.
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system indicator light
(Orange; if so equipped)
The light will blink if the vehicle is traveling
close to either the left or the right of the
traveling lane.
The light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
system. See “Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) system” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel in the
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel
gauge reaches E.
There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge
needle reaches E.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this
light illuminates for about 1 second and
turns off.
Low tire pressure warning (for models
without run-flat tire only):
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
If you select the tire pressure information
in the display, the FLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed. The tire pressure for
each tire will also be displayed.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the light OFF.
For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section and the “6. In
case of emergency” section.
Low tire pressure warning (for models
with run-flat tire only):
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
If you select the tire pressure information
in the display, the FLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed. The tire pressure for
each tire will also be displayed.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn the light
OFF.
Flat tire warning (for models with run-flat
tire only):
If the vehicle is being driven with one or
more flat tires, the warning light will flash
continuously and a chime will sound for 10
seconds.
The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the warning light
will flash continuously. When the Flat tire
warning is activated, have the system reset
and the tire checked and replaced if necessary by an INFINITI dealer. Even if the tire
is inflated to the specified COLD tire pressure, the warning light will continue to
flash until the system is reset by an INFINITI dealer.
If you select the tire pressure information
in the display, the FLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed. The tire pressure for
each tire will also be displayed.
Your vehicle can be driven for a limited
time on a flat tire. See “Run-flat tires” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section and in the “6.
In case of emergency” section.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is turned ON. The light will remain
on after the 1 minute. Have the system
checked by an INFINITI dealer.
For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O
O
O
If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch turned ON, have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as
soon as possible.
If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result
in serious personal injury. Check the tire
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If the light
still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be
flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire as soon as possible.
Although you can continue driving with a
punctured run-flat tire (if so equipped),
remember that vehicle handling stability
is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a
long distance at high speeds may
damage the tires.
O
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88
km/h) and do not drive more than 50
miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat
tire (if so equipped). The actual distance
the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle
load, road conditions and other factors.
CAUTION
O
The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
O
If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of
less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS
may not operate correctly.
O
Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Low washer fluid warning
light
O
Do not tow a trailer when a run-flat tire (if
so equipped) is flat.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
This light comes on when the washer fluid
is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
The light and chime remind you to fasten
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever
the ignition switch is turned to ON, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat
belt is fastened. At the same time, the
O
Seat belt warning light and
chime
2-14 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.
O The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is
not fastened when the front passenger’s
seat is occupied (if so equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
O The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section for precautions on seat
belt usage.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light will illuminate. The supplemental air
bag warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
systems, and pre-tensioner seat belt need
servicing and your vehicle must be taken to
an INFINITI dealer.
O The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. For additional information, see
“Supplemental restraint system” in the “1.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental front
air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain
side-impact air bag systems and/or pretensioner seat belt systems will not operate
in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by
an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic transmission
position indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the indicator in the tachometer shows the automatic transmission selector lever position. See “Driving with automatic transmission” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
Cruise main switch indicator
light (Green)
The light comes on when the cruise control
is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. While the
cruise control system main switch indicator
light is on, the cruise control system is operational.
Cruise set switch indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system.
If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light
(
) will be lit and the passenger front
air bag will be OFF depending on how the
front passenger seat is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “INFINITI advanced air bag
system” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(Blue)
This light comes on when the headlight
high beam is on and goes out when the low
beam is selected.
Intelligent Cruise Control
system MAIN switch
indicator light (Green; if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the ICC system
MAIN switch is pushed. The light goes out
when the MAIN switch is pushed again.
While the MAIN switch indicator light comes
on, the ICC system is operational.
Intelligent Cruise Control
system set switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the Intelligent Cruise Control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the Intelligent Cruise Control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control
system inspection/maintenance test. See
“Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
Operation
The malfunction indicator lamp will come
on in one of two ways:
After a few driving trips, the
lamp
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady —
An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuelfiller cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
lamp should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the
lamp does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking —
An engine misfire has been detected
which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
If this indicator lamp comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45
MPH (72 km/h).
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL)
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission
control malfunction.
The malfunction indicator lamp may also
come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose
or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.
Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three gallons of fuel in the
fuel tank.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having
the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible
damage to the emission control system.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC
system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact
that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Snow mode switch indicator
light
When selecting SNOW mode while the engine is running, this light will illuminate.
See “Snow mode switch” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The light flashes when the turn signal
switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) off indicator light
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch is pushed to
OFF. This indicates the VDC system and
traction control system are not operating.
When the VDC off indicator light and slip indicator light come on with the VDC system
turned on, this light alerts the driver to the
fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is
operating, i.e. the VDC system may not be
functioning properly. Have the system
checked by an INFINITI dealer. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
system” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
The chime will sound if the driver’s side
door is opened while the key is left in the
ignition switch (ignition switch is turned
off). Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
The headlights will turn off when the front
door is opened with the light switch on unless the ignition switch is in the ON position, or in the case of a model with the Intelligent Key, when the ignition switch is
not in the LOCK position.
When you turn the headlight switch ON again
after the lights automatically turn off and
when you open the driver’s door, the lights
will not turn off automatically and a chime will
sound instead. See the battery saver system
under “Headlight switch” in this section for
details. Make sure to turn the light switch off
when you leave the vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Brake pad wear warning
system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
chime (if so equipped)
If the vehicle is traveling close to either the
left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers, the LDW system will blink
the LDW indicator light and a chime sound.
SIC2133
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
O Vehicle security system
O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
The condition of the security indicator light
shows the status of the Vehicle Security
System and the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops, Your INFINITI dealer may
also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audio alarm signals if someone opens
the doors, hood, or lift gate when the
2-18 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
When using the remote keyless entry,
the hazard indicators will operate as
shown in “Remote keyless entry
system” or “Intelligent Key system” in
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
SIC2153
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the windows are open.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Close and lock all doors and the hood.
Lock all doors by pushing the lock
button on the keyfob, Intelligent Key or
the front door handle request switch or
by using the key.
4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator
A comes on. The SECURITY indilight j
A glows for about 30 seccator light j
onds and then blinks. The system is
now activated. If, during this 30 second
time period, the door is unlocked by the
key or the remote keyless entry, or the
ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the
system will not be armed.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors and the hood locked and ignition key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC
to turn the system off.
Vehicle security system activation
The security system will give the following
alarm:
O The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
O The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 1 minute. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut
off by unlocking a door with the key, or
by pressing the UNLOCK button on the
electronic ignition key.
The alarm is activated by:
O Opening the door without using the key
or remote keyless entry.
O Opening the lift gate without using the
key or remote keyless entry.
O Opening the hood.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop only by unlocking a
door with the key, by pressing the door
handle request switch or by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the keyfob or Intelligent
Key. The alarm will not stop if the ignition
switch is turned to ACC or ON.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered key (for example, when interference
is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
key.
If this procedure allows the engine to
start, INFINITI recommends placing
the registered key on a separate key
ring to avoid interference from other devices.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSYIMMOBILISER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE
THE EQUIPMENT.
SIC2153
Security indicator light
A blinks whenThe security indicator light j
ever the ignition key is removed for 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the OFF
position (mechanical key) or the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position (Intelligent
Key). This function indicates the security
systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
If a non-registered key is in the ignition
switch, the indicator light comes on.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
If INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
ally. See “How to use the SETTING
button” in the “4. Display screen,
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see an INFINITI dealer
for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
service as soon as possible. Please bring
all electronic ignition keys that you have
when visiting an INFINITI dealer for service.
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed opj
eration
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed operaj
tion
4 to have one sweep opPush the lever up j
eration (MIST) of the wiper.
SIC3037
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at
the following speed:
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operaj
tion can be adjusted by turning the
A (Slower) or j
B (Faster).
knob toward j
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed. (For example, when the vehicle
speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) You can
switch this function on and off manu-
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you j
washer. Then the wiper will also operate
several times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
CAUTION
O
Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
O
Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
O
Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
O
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure
your vision. Warm the rear window with the
defroster before you wash the rear window.
CAUTION
O
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and
remove the snow etc. on and around the
wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn
the switch ON again to operate the wiper.
O
Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
O
Do not operate the washer if reservoir
tank is empty.
O
Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol based
SIC3038
The rear window wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operaj
tion (not adjustable)
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed opj
eration
3 to operate the
Push the switch forward j
washer. Then the wiper will also operate
several times.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS
washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
O
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
WARNING
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.
HIGH VOLTAGE
SIC3072
To defog/defrost the rear window glass
and outside mirrors, start the engine and
1 . The indicator light
push the switch on j
A will come on. Push the switch again to
j
turn the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the
rear window defroster.
O
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or
disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced at an INFINITI
dealer.
O
Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights.
If they are not correctly aimed, they
might temporarily blind an oncoming
driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer
and have the headlights adjusted correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially
turned on, its brightness or color varies
slightly. However, the color and brightness
will soon stabilize.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to
turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle
stops at a traffic signal). Even when the
daytime running lights are active
(Canada only), the xenon headlights do
not turn on. This way the life of the
xenon headlights is not reduced.
O If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact an
INFINITI dealer.
Type A
SIC3120
Type B
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
1 Turn the switch to the
j
CAUTION
position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
plate and instrument lights will come
on.
2 Turn the switch to the
j
SIC1961
Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
position:
Headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark, turn off
the headlights when it is light, and keep
the headlights on for up to 45 seconds
after you turn the switch to OFF and open
any door then close all the doors.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF and one
of the doors is opened and this condition is
continued, the headlights remain ON for 5
minutes.
SIC3121
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automatically.
To set the autolight system:
SIC2142A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
A located on the top leftphoto sensor j
hand side of the instrument panel. The
photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is
covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is
dark and the headlights will illuminate.
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF,
, or
position.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Battery saver system
O When the headlight switch is in the
or
position while the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the lights
will automatically turn off 5 minutes
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the OFF position.
SIC3122
Headlight beam select
1
j
To select the low beam, put the lever in
the neutral position as shown.
2 To select the high beam, push the lever
j
forward. Pull it back to select the low
beam.
3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash
j
the headlight high beam.
O When the headlight switch remains in
the
or
position after the
lights automatically turn off, the lights
will turn on for 5 minutes when the
headlight switch is turned to the OFF
position and then turn to the
or
position.
SIC2141
Headlight aiming control
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight
switch to the OFF position when the engine is
not running to avoid discharging the battery.
Depending on the number of occupants in
the vehicle and the load it is carrying, the
headlight axis may be higher than desired.
If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road,
the headlights may directly hit the rearview
mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle. The light
axis can be lowered with the operation of
the switch.
The larger the number designated on the
switch, the lower the axis.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
When traveling with no heavy load or on a
flat road, select position 0.
WARNING
Xenon headlights are extremely bright compared to conventional headlights. If the
xenon headlights hit the rearview mirror of
the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the
oncoming vehicle, the driver of these vehicles may have difficulty driving because of
the brightness. Use the headlight aiming
control switch to lower the light axis. See
“Xenon headlights” earlier in this section for
additional information.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(CANADA ONLY)
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime
running lights operate with the headlight
switch in the OFF position or in the
position.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running
lights do not illuminate. The daytime run-
ning lights illuminate once the parking
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is turned off.
The daytime running light may come on
after turning the key to the OFF position
and immediately turning it to the ON position. This is not a malfunction.
The daytime running light will be turned off
when the headlight switch is turned to the
position.
AUTO or
The daytime running light will remain on
until the ignition switch is turned to the
ACC or OFF position.
Turn the fog light switch to the
position to turn the fog light ON when driving at
night if necessary.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
SIC2140
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates
when the light switch is in the
or
position.
To adjust the brightness of instrument
panel lights, press the control switches located on the left side of the meter panel.
A will brighten
Pressing the upper switch j
B dims the
the lights. The lower switch j
lights. Repeatedly pressing the lower
switch will turn the lights off.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
SIC3123
SIC3057
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
1 Turn signal
j
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
switch to the
position. To turn them
off, turn the switch to the OFF position.
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
2 Lane change signal
j
To indicate a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the point where lights begin
flashing.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.
SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will
flash.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
WARNING
O
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
HORN
O
Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so
slowly that your vehicle might become a
hazard to other traffic.
O
Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
SIC2143
To sound the horn, push around the horn
marks of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could
affect proper operation of the supplemental
front air bag system. Tampering with the
supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.
SIC2793
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters. The switches located on the center
console can be operated independently
A and front passenger
(driver side seat j
B ) of each other.
seat j
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
1 For low heat, push the
j
(Low)
2 For high heat, push the
j
(High)
side of the switch.
side of the switch.
3 For no heat, the switch has a center
j
OFF position between low and high.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SWITCH (if so equipped)
C will
The indicator light in the switch j
illuminate when low or high is selected.
O
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
O
Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
O
When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
O
If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
or before you leave the vehicle, be sure
to turn the switch to the off position
3 .
(center) j
CAUTION
O
The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
O
Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the seat.
O
Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may
become overheated.
SIC2554
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
will blink an indicator light on the instrument panel and sound a chime to alert the
driver if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of the traveling
lane.
The system comes on automatically in its
automatic mode when the ignition switch
is turned on.
To cancel the LDW system, push the LDW
1 to turn off the system. The LDW
switch j
2 will go off.
system ON indicator j
2-30 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SNOW MODE SWITCH
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
SWITCH
Push the LDW switch again or restart the
engine to turn the system on. Modes can
be changed to automatic mode or manual
mode by pushing and holding the LDW
switch for more than 4 seconds while the
LDW system ON indicator is off. See “Lane
departure warning (LDW) system” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.
SSD0351
For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy
roads or slippery areas, turn on the SNOW
mode switch and the SNOW indicator light
on the meter panel will illuminate. When
the SNOW mode is activated, engine
output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.
SIC1881
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System on for
most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine RPM will be
reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator will come
on.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CLOCK
POWER OUTLET
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
CAUTION
SIC2772
If the power supply is disconnected, the
clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.
O
The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
O
This power outlet is not designed for use
with a cigarette lighter unit.
O
Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do
not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory.
O
Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
O
Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, climate controlled seat,
headlights or rear window defroster is
on.
O
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure to turn off the power switch of
the electrical accessory being used or
the ACC power of the vehicle.
O
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
ADJUSTING THE TIME
1. To set the clock forward, push the
1 .
button j
2. To set the clock backward, push the
2 .
button j
3. To move forward or backward faster,
push and hold the button more than 5
seconds.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
O
When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
The power outlet is for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones.
Console
SIC2144
Front
SIC3073
Instruments and controls 2-33
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
STORAGE
CAUTION
Rear
SIC3124
O
Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
O
Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.
SIC1844A
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The sunglasses holder can be opened by
A .
pushing the button j
WARNING
Luggage room
O
The sunglasses holder should not be
used while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
O
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
SIC2146
2-34 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
STORAGE BOX
CAUTION
WARNING
O
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
O
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
The storage box should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
A as ilTo open, push the storage box lid j
lustrated.
Do not place valuable items in the storage
box.
Do not use the storage box as an ashtray.
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
SIC3125
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SIC3118
SIC2149
SIC1888A
Front cup holder
Rear cup holder
GLOVE BOX
1 .
To open the cup holder, push the lid j
Push the cup holder opener switch to draw
out the rear cup holder.
1 .
To open the glove box, pull the handle j
The flap will be folded down when inserting
a large container.
To close, lower the cup holder lid and push
it down lightly.
To clean the front cup holder, pull up the in2 and remove it.
side tray j
To close, push the lid in until the lock
latches.
2 or unlock j
3 the glove box, use
To lock j
the master key, mechanical key or wallet
key.
The cup holder is not designed to store personal effects.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CONSOLE BOX
WARNING
The center console box should not be used
while driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
CAUTION
To avoid being pinched, do not place your fingers near the hinge when opening/
closing the console box.
A is pushed, the upper
When the button j
case is available for storing some small
B is pulled, the botitems. When the lever j
tom case is available for storing some
larger ones.
SIC3074
2-38 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SIC3151
LUGGAGE FLOOR BOXES (if so
equipped)
To open the luggage floor boxes:
1. Raise the luggage box lid.
1 and insert it
2. Remove the assist bar j
2 .
into the slot j
SIC2154
CARD HOLDER (for driver’s side)
A in
To use the card holder, slide your card j
B .
after lowering the sun visor j
SIC2151
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
The cargo net helps keep packages in the
cargo area from moving around while your
vehicle is driven.
To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to
the retainers.
WARNING
To close, reset the assist bar to its original
position.
O
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
O
Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the net
must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or the
net may not stay secured.
O
Never put anything on the tonneau cover,
no matter how small. Any object on it
could cause an injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
O
Do not leave the tonneau cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder.
O
Never remove the tonneau cover with the
rear seatbacks reclined. The tonneau
cover may jump up suddenly and could
cause an injury in the removal procedure.
O
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a
sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
O
The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with the tonneau
cover or items in the cargo area. Remove
the tonneau cover from the vehicle or secure it and any cargo. Your child couldbe
seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.
SIC2626
TONNEAU COVER (if so equipped)
1 keeps the luggage
The tonneau cover j
compartment contents hidden from the
outside.
To open the tonneau cover, pull it out and
2 . To close
hang both sides on the hooks j
the tonneau cover, remove it from the
hooks and then release it as illustrated.
To remove the tonneau cover, pat gently
3
the bottom of the tonneau cover frame j
4
upward and remove it from the holder j
after closing the tonneau cover and folding
the rear seatbacks forward.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
O
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is
in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position and for
about 45 seconds, after the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s
door or the front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
Main switch
SIC2630
Main power window switch
(driver’s side)
1. Rear left passenger side window
2. Driver side window
3. Window lock button
4. Rear right passenger side window
5. Front passenger side window
To open or close the window, push down
A or pull up j
B the switch and hold it. The
j
main switch (driver side switches) will
open or close all the windows.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Locking passenger’s windows
C is pushed in, only
When the lock button j
the driver side window can be opened or
closed. Push it in again to cancel.
Passenger side
SIC2152A
Main switch
SIC2923
Passenger side power window
switch
Automatic operation (For front door
windows)
The passenger side switch will open or
close only the corresponding window. To
open or close the window, hold the switch
A or up j
B .
down j
To fully open or close the window, completely press or lift the switch and release
it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To
stop the window, just press or lift the
switch on the opposite side.
Auto reverse function
If the control unit detects something
caught in a window as it moves up, the
window will be immediately lowered.
2-42 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SUNROOF (if so equipped)
The auto reverse function can be activated
when a window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the
ON position or for about 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the ACC,
OFF or LOCK position.
need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the
roof, press the switch once more while it is
opening or closing.
To open or close the sunroof and stop on
1
the way, press the switch to the CLOSE j
2 side. The roof will stop when
or OPEN j
releasing the switch.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.
Tilting the sunroof
WARNING
SIC1854A
There are some small distances immediately
before the closed position which cannot be
detected. Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before
closing the window.
To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then press
2 side of the switch and release it;
the UP j
it need not be held. To tilt down the sun1 side.
roof, press the DOWN j
AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
Sun shade
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Open or close the sun shade by sliding it
backward or forward.
The automatic sunroof is operational for
about 45 seconds, even if the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.
The shade will open automatically when
the sunroof is opened. However, it must be
closed manually.
Sliding the sunroof
The auto reverse function can be activated
when the sunroof is closed or tilted down
by automatic operation when the ignition
key is in the ON position or for about 45
To fully open or close the sunroof, press
1 or OPEN j
2
the switch to the CLOSE j
side for less than 1 second and release it; it
Auto reverse function (When
closing or tilting down the sunroof)
Instruments and controls 2-43
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunroof occurs.
WARNING
O
In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
O
Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the
sunroof opening while the vehicle is in
motion or while the sunroof is closing.
There are some small distances immediately
before the closed position which cannot be
detected. Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before
closing the sunroof.
CAUTION
O
Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the sunroof before opening.
O
Do not place any heavy object on the
sunroof or surrounding area.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something
caught in the sunroof as it moves to the
front, the sunroof will immediately open
backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something
caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the
sunroof will immediately tilt up.
2. Press and hold the switch to the
CLOSE/UP side for approximately 3 seconds while the sunroof is tilted up.
WARNING
3. Release the switch once, then press
and hold the switch to the CLOSE/UP
side again for approximately 10 seconds until the sunroof moves automatically.
4. The sunroof will automatically open
and then close all the way.
If the sunroof does not operate properly after step 4, repeat the procedure starting
with step 1.
If the sunroof still does not close, have an
INFINITI dealer check and repair the sunroof.
If the sunroof does not close
If the sunroof does not close or open automatically, use the following procedure to
return sunroof operation to normal.
1. Press the switch to the CLOSE/UP side
to tilt up the sunroof.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
INTERIOR LIGHT
O The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
O The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the 30 second
timer is activated, when:
O The driver’s door is locked either with
the keyfob, a key, the power door lock
switch or using the Intelligent Key
system.
SIC1857A
ROOM LIGHT
The room light has a two-position switch;
1 and OFF j
2 .
DOOR j
1 ,
When the switch is in the door position j
the light will illuminate when a door is
opened.
The light will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:
O The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a
key, the power door lock switch or
using the Intelligent Key system while
all doors are closed.
O Opening or closing any door
O Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a
key or the power door lock switch.
O Inserting or removing a key from the ignition switch
These lights will turn on again when any of
the above operations is performed after the
lights have turned off automatically. (The
lights will turn off 30 minutes after the
latest operation of the above as well.)
CAUTION
O The ignition switch is turned ON.
MAP LIGHT
3 is pushed in, the light
When the switch j
3 is pushed
will turn on. When the switch j
again, the light will turn off.
When the map light switch is in the ON position, it will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to the OFF position. To turn on the
light again, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position.
O
Turn off the map, personal and vanity
mirror lights when you leave the vehicle.
O
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
The map, personal, and vanity mirror lights
will automatically turn off 30 minutes after
the latest operation of the following with
the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position:
Instruments and controls 2-45
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SIC2179
SIC1858A
CEILING LIGHT (if so equipped)
REAR PERSONAL LIGHT
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch.
The rear personal light has a three-position
switch.
B ,
When the switch is in the door position j
the light will illuminate when the door is
opened. Same as the door position of the
interior light.
B ,
When the switch is in the door position j
the light will illuminate when the door is
opened.
When the personal light switch is in the
A , it will automatically turn
ON position j
off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has
C . To turn
been turned to the OFF position j
on the light again, turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
Body side
SIC2925
When the personal light switch is in the
A , it will automatically turn
ON position j
off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has
C . To turn
been turned to the OFF position j
on the light again, turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
Door side
2-46 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SIC2926
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if
so equipped)
LUGGAGE ROOM LIGHT
This luggage room light has a threeposition switch.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
A ,
When the switch is in the door position j
the light illuminates while the lift gate is
opened. When the lift gate is closed, the
light will go off.
Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink
power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to the OFF position.
When the luggage room light switch is in
C , the luggage room light
the on position j
illuminates, regardless of any condition.
B ,
When the switch is in the off position j
the light will turn off.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
SIC2555
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on
A is
when the cover on the vanity mirror j
opened.
When the vanity mirror light stays on, it
will automatically turn off 30 minutes after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
OFF position. To turn on the light again,
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
O Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
No separate batteries are required. If
the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is
disconnected, HomeLink will retain all
programming.
Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures
(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of
the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink
Universal Transceiver buttons should be
erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming
HomeLink ” later in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-47
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O
O
Do not use the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver with any garage door opener
that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured
after April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object in
the path of a closing garage door and
then automatically stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
During the programming procedure, your
garage door or security gate will open or
close (if the transmitter is within range).
Make sure that people and objects are
clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that
you are programming.
O
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
To program your HomeLink Universal
Transceiver to operate a garage door, gate,
or entry door opener, home or office
lighting, you need to be at the same location as the device. Note: Garage door openers (manufactured after 1996) have
“rolling code protection”. To program a garage door opener equipped with “rolling
code protection”; you will need to use a
ladder to get up to the garage door opener
motor to be able to access the “smart or
learn” program button.
SIC3040
1. To begin, press and hold the 2 outer
HomeLink
buttons (to clear the
A
memory) until the indicator light j
blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both
buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the
HomeLink surface.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
programmed HomeLink button - releasing when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then
turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a
“rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the
next steps to train the HomeLink to
complete the programming which may
require a ladder and another person for
convenience.
SIC3041
3. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold both the HomeLink
button you want to program and the
hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes,
changing from a “slow blink” to a
“rapid blink”. When the indicator light
blinks rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the
6. Press and release the training button
located on the garage door opener’s
motor to activate the “training mode”.
This button is usually located near the
antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under
a light lens, you will need to remove the
lens to access the training button.
NOTE:
Once you have pressed and released the
training button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit,
you have 30 seconds in which to perform
step 7. Use the help of a second person for
convenience to assist when performing
this step.
7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing
and releasing the garage door opener
program button, firmly press and release the HomeLink button you have
just programmed. Press and release
the HomeLink button up to three times
to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink button should now be
programmed. (To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow
steps 2-8 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step one unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed
HomeLink buttons).
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web
site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
FOR
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your
hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-
Instruments and controls 2-49
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
tinue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under “Programming HomeLink ”) while you press
and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming).
NOTE:
If programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener
components.
OPERATING THE HomeLink
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink
Universal Transceiver
(once programmed) may now be used to
activate the garage door, etc. To operate,
simply press the appropriate programmed
HomeLink Universal Transceiver button.
The red indicator light will illuminate while
the signal is being transmitted.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn
the hand-held transmitter information:
O replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
O position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink surface.
O press and hold both the HomeLink
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
O position the hand-held transmitter 2 to
5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the
HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed
within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the
indicator light in view at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this
Owner’s Manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to clear all programming, press and
hold the two outside buttons and release
when the indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HomeLink BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. Do not release the button until
step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50
to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink
surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The HomeLink
Universal Transceiver
button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pushing the
HomeLink
button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any
other programmed HomeLink buttons.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into HomeLink
. Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of
those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference that may
be received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
Instruments and controls 2-51
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
2-52 Instruments and controls
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys (except Intelligent Key) ............................. 3-2
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys... 3-2
Doors ............................................................... 3-3
Locking with key (Driver’s door only) ............ 3-3
Opening and closing windows with the key... 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob ...................... 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch ............ 3-4
Child safety rear door lock ........................... 3-5
Remote keyless entry system (models without
Intelligent Key system) ..................................... 3-5
How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-6
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) .............. 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution .................. 3-11
Intelligent Key operation ........................... 3-12
Opening and closing windows.................... 3-13
Operating the engine ................................. 3-14
Intelligent Key operating range ................. 3-16
Warning signals......................................... 3-17
Trouble-shooting guide.............................. 3-19
Operation with intelligent remote keyless
entry system .............................................
Operation with the mechanical key and
valet key ...................................................
Hood ..............................................................
Lift gate ..........................................................
Auto closure .............................................
Fuel-filler door ................................................
Open the fuel-filler door.............................
Fuel-filler cap ............................................
Tilting telescopic steering column ...................
Automatic operation ..................................
Sun visors ......................................................
Mirrors ...........................................................
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ..............
Outside mirrors .........................................
Automatic drive positioner ..............................
Memory storage function ...........................
Entry/exit function ....................................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
3-20
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-33
KEYS (except Intelligent Key)
3. Valet key (With built-in transponder
chip; INFINITI mark-black)
The valet key cannot be used for glove box
lock.
4. Key number plate
To protect belongings when you leave a key
with someone, give them the valet key
only.
5. Wallet key
6. key case (Card type)
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in
the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see an
INFINITI dealer for duplicates by using the
key number.
A key number is necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, an
INFINITI dealer can duplicate it.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
SPA1882
1. Master key 1 (With built-in transponder
chip; INFINITI mark-silver)
2. Master key 2 (With built-in transponder
chip; INFINITI mark-silver)
You can only drive your vehicle using the
master or valet keys which are registered
to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System components in your vehicle. These
keys have a transponder chip in the key
head.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is
not necessary when you need extra
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys. An INFINITI dealer can duplicate it.
As many as 5 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys can be used with one vehicle.
You should bring all registered keys that
you have to an INFINITI dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes
previously registered into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will
only recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System during
registration. Any key that is not given to
your dealer at the time of registration will
no longer be able to start your vehicle.
The master key can be used for all the
locks.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
DOORS
Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with salt water. This
could affect system function.
WARNING
O
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this
provides greater safety in the event of an
accident by helping to prevent persons
from being thrown from the vehicle. This
also helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors, and
will help keep out intruders.
O
Before opening any door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.
O
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Intelligent Key system, refer to “Intelligent Key
system” later in this section.
SPA1442A
LOCKING WITH KEY (Driver’s door
only)
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors simultaneously.
O Turning the driver’s door key lock with
the metal key (master key, mechanical
key, valet key and wallet key) toward
1 will lock all
the front of the vehicle j
doors.
O Turning the driver’s door key one time
2 will unlock
to the rear of the vehicle j
the driver’s door. From that position, returning the key to neutral (where the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
key can only be removed and inserted)
and turning it to the rear again within 5
seconds will unlock all doors. (including the lift gate) and fuel-filler door.
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
WITH THE KEY
The driver’s door key operation allows you
to open and close the front windows simultaneously.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for
longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked
and the window keeps opening while
turning the key.
This function can also be performed by
pushing and holding the door UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key. Refer to “Intelligent remote keyless entry system” later in
this section.
To close the windows, turn the driver’s
door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle
for longer than 1 second. The door is
locked and the window keeps closing while
turning the key.
SPA1422A
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To individually lock the doors, move the in1 ,
side lock knob to the LOCK position j
then close the door. To unlock, pull up the
inside lock knob to the UNLOCK position
2 .
j
When locking the door without a key, be
sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
SPA1505D
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch located on the driver’s or front passenger’s
armrest will lock or unlock all doors including the lift gate.
To lock the doors, push the power door
1 with the
lock switch to the lock position j
driver’s or front passenger’s door open,
then close the door.
When locking the door this way, be certain
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (models
without Intelligent Key system)
To unlock, push the power door lock switch
2 .
to the unlock position j
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or
front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any
door open, all doors will lock and unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the
keys from being accidentally locked inside
the vehicle.
SPA1618A
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locking helps prevent doors
from being opened accidentally, especially
when small children are in the vehicle.
1 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position j
the rear door can be opened only from the
outside.
To disengage, move the lever to the FREE
2 .
position j
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including the lift gate) and fuel-filler door and
activate the panic alarm by using the
keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
key is not left in the vehicle.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the
purchase and use of additional keyfob,
contact an INFINITI dealer.
The keyfob will not function when:
O the battery is completely discharged,
O the distance between the vehicle and
the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences will
damage the keyfob.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.
O
Do not drop the keyfob.
O
Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
O
Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob.
This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please
contact an INFINITI dealer.
SPA1397B
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Setting hazard indicator and horn
mode
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and
horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
1 is pushed, the hazard
the LOCK button j
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
2 is
once. When the UNLOCK button j
pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems”.
Locking doors and fuel-filler door
1. Remove the ignition key.*1,*2
2. Close all the doors.*3
1 on the keyfob.
3. Push the LOCK button j
4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will
lock.
SPA1260
If hazard indicator and horn mode is not
necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the switching
procedure.
In hazard indicator only mode, when the
1 is pushed, the hazard indiLOCK button j
cator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK but2 is pushed, neither the hazard inditon j
cator nor the horn operates.
(Switching procedure)
1 and UNLOCK j
2 buttons
Push the LOCK j
on the keyfob simultaneously for more
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK
1 on the keyfob is pushed even
button j
though a door remains open and/or the ignition key is in the ON position.
than 2 seconds to switch from one mode to
the other.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn chirps once.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator
flashes 3 times.
1 is pushed
O When the LOCK button j
with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
once as a reminder that the doors are
already locked.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps
once.
The hazard indicator and horn mode also
can be changed with vehicle electronic systems on the monitor. See “4. Display
*1: Doors lock with the keyfob while a key
is in the ignition switch. However, the
panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
*2: Doors lock with the keyfob while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
However, the hazard indicator and
horn will not function.
*3: Doors lock with the keyfob while any
door is open. However, the hazard indicator and horn will not function.
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door
2 on the key1. Push the UNLOCK button j
fob once.
O The driver’s door and fuel-filler door unlock
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON
position.
O The interior light turns on and the light
timer activates for 30 seconds when the
switch is in the DOOR position with the
ignition key in any position except the
ON position.
2 on the key2. Push the UNLOCK button j
fob again within 5 seconds.
O All doors unlock
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute of pushing the UN2 .
LOCK button j
O any door is opened
The rear door windows will operate 0.5 seconds after the front windows’ operation. (if
so equipped)
Using the panic alarm
O the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking
the doors with the keyfob.
3 on the
1. Push the PANIC button j
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds with
the key removed from the ignition
switch.
Opening the windows
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights
will stay on for 30 seconds.
2 on the keyfob.
Push the UNLOCK button j
The driver’s door will unlock.
2 for
Continue to push the UNLOCK button j
3 seconds. The door windows will be lowered.
2
Continue to push the UNLOCK button j
until windows are fully open.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
O It has run for 30 seconds, or
1 or the UNLOCK j
2 button
O The LOCK j
is pushed, or
3 is pushed on the
O The PANIC button j
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
To stop lowering the windows, release the
2 .
UNLOCK button j
To start lowering the windows, push the
2 again for more than 3
UNLOCK button j
seconds.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key uses coded radio signals to communicate with the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key is near the vehicle, such as in your pocket or purse, it allows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked, or
started without inserting the ignition key.
It is also possible to use the remote control
entry function.
CAUTION
O
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you.
O
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key inside.
O The Intelligent Key may not function
correctly depending on the environment or operating conditions. It could
also malfunction if you do not use it
correctly.
O The Intelligent Key transmits faint
radio waves.
In the following situations, the Intelligent Key and remote control entry functions may not operate correctly, and
you may have to use the metal key (mechanical key, valet key or wallet key):
• when there are strong signals
coming from a television tower,
power station or broadcasting station.
the battery could quickly run down. Do
not place the Intelligent Key near an
electric appliance such as a television
set or personal computer.
• when you have wireless equipment
or a cellular phone with you.
• when the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by a metallic material.
• when radio wave-type remote control
entry is used nearby.
• when the Intelligent Key is placed
near an electric appliance such as a
personal computer.
O The Intelligent Key continually consumes battery power as the key receives a signal to communicate with
the vehicle. Battery life is about 2
years, although it varies depending on
the operating conditions. When the
battery of the Intelligent Key is low,
the green blinking key warning light
goes out about 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON. If the
battery runs down, replace it with a
new one.
O If the Intelligent Key receives strong
signal over an extended period of time,
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
*: Refer to “INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys” earlier in this section.
WARNING
O
The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves that can adversely affect medical
electric equipment.
O
If you have a pacemaker, you should
contact the medical equipment manufacturer to ask if it will be affected by the Intelligent Key signal.
The valet key cannot be used for the glove
box lock.
To protect belongings when you leave a key
with someone, give them the valet key
only.
SPA1873
1.
2.
3.
4.
Intelligent Key 2 sets
Mechanical key (metal key)* 2 sets
Valet key (metal key)* 1 set
Wallet key and key case (card type)
(metal key) 1 set
5. Key number plate 1 set
Record the key number on the key number
plate/metal tag and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), NOT IN THE VEHICLE.
A key number plate is supplied with your
key. Keep the plate in a safe place. INFINITI does not record key numbers so it is
very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional
Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions can become cancelled. Contact an INFINITI dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To
avoid damaging it, please note the following.
— Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
— Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
— Do not place the Intelligent Key near an
electric appliance such as a television
set or personal computer.
O After locking with the door handle request switch, make sure the doors are
securely locked.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key in a storage area (for example, a door pocket or
glove box). It could be damaged or activated unexpectedly.
O To prevent the Intelligent Key from
being left inside the vehicle, make sure
you carry the key with you and then lock
the doors.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come
into contact with water or salt water, and
be careful not to let the key be washed in
a washing machine. This could affect the
system function.
O You can lock or unlock the doors using
only the door handle, which detects the
Intelligent Key.
O
O
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
INFINITI recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure,
please contact an INFINITI dealer.
tronic system on the monitor. See “4.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner
and audio systems”.
O It is not possible to lock the doors with
the lock knob when the driver’s door is
open, the ignition switch is pushed in
or the metal key is in the ignition
switch.
O When you try to unlock the door while
pulling the door handle, the door may
not unlock. In this case, release the
door handle and the door will unlock.
Pull the door handle again and the door
will open.
O The outside beep, which indicates the
lock and unlock functions, can be canceled with the LOCK/UNLOCK button on
the Intelligent Key and the vehicle elec-
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
3. Push any front door or the lift gate
handle request switch while carrying
the Intelligent Key with you.*4
4. All the doors, lift gate and fuel-filler
door will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
door buzzer sounds twice.
The hazard indicator and horn mode also
can be changed with vehicle electronic
systems on the monitor. See “4. Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems”.
SPA1874
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out from your pocket or
purse.
SPA1627
When you carry the Intelligent Key with
you, you can lock or unlock all doors by
A
pushing the door handle request switch j
B within
or lift gate handle request switch j
the range of operation.
Locking doors
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key if any
metal key is in the ignition switch.*1,
*2
2. Close all the doors.*3
*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key
while a mechanical key or valet key is
in the ignition switch.
*2: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key
while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
*3: Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch or the LOCK
button on the Intelligent Key while any
door is open. A beep sounds to warn
you. However, doors lock with the
metal key even if any door is open.
*4: Doors do not lock with door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a beep sounds
to warn you.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked
with another Intelligent Key.
O any door is opened
O the ignition switch is pushed
Unlocking doors
O the mechanical key or the valet key is
inserted into the ignition switch
1. Push the door handle request switch
once.
The interior light, ceiling light (if so
equipped) and step light can be turned off
without waiting for 30 seconds by turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or by
locking the doors.
Driver’s side:
O The driver door and fuel-filler door unlock.
Front passenger side or lift gate:
O Only corresponding door unlocks.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and
door buzzer sounds once if all doors are
completely closed with the ignition key
in any position except the ON position.
3. Push the door handle request switch
again within 5 seconds.
O All doors and the fuel-filler door unlock.
O The hazard indicator flashes once and
door buzzer sounds once if all doors are
completely closed.
All doors will be locked automatically after
pressing the unlocking button unless one
of the following operations is performed
within 1 minute.
The door windows will open or close while
turning the metal key. See “Doors” earlier
in this section.
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS
O To open the windows, push the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key for about
3 seconds or turn the driver’s door key
lock with the metal key to the rear of the
vehicle for about 2 seconds after the
door is unlocked.
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK
button or turn the key to the neutral position.
O To close the windows, turn the driver’s
door key lock to the front of the vehicle
for about 2 seconds after the door is
locked.
To stop closing, turn the key to the neutral position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
D :
ACC (Accessories) j
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
E :
ON (Normal operating position) j
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period.This can discharge the battery.
F :
START j
SPA1628
OPERATING THE ENGINE
Ignition switch positions
B range
Push in the ignition switch in the j
when you turn it.
A :
LOCK (Normal parking position) j
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the knob
immediately. It will automatically return to
the ON position.
For important safety information, see “Ignition switch” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.
The ignition switch cannot be turned back
to the LOCK position unless the shift lever
is in P position. (It can be turned to only
C .)
j
The ignition switch can only be locked in
A position.
the j
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed in, and turned to the ACC posiD while carrying the Intelligent Key.
tion j
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4. When the engine starts, release the ignition switch.
O The engine may not start if the Intelligent Key is placed:
WARNING
Do not start the engine from outside the vehicle through the window. Doing so could
lead to an accident and injury. Be sure to sit
in the driver’s seat to use the key.
SPA2193
Starting the engine
When driving the vehicle, be sure to carry
the Intelligent Key with you.
1. Securely depress the brake pedal.
2. Slowly push the ignition switch in.
When the Intelligent Key warning light
a in the instrument panel comes on in
j
green, the ignition switch can be
turned.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
the engine will be started.
it is turned quickly, it may stick and be
difficult to turn.
For important safety information, see
“Starting the engine” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
O When the ignition switch is pushed
under the following conditions, the key
warning light in the instrument panel
comes on in red. It is not possible to
turn the ignition switch when:
• you do not have the Intelligent Key
with you
• the Intelligent Key battery has run
down
• inside the glove box or the door
pocket
• on the instrument panel
• in the corner of interior compartment.
O If it is difficult to turn the ignition
switch, perform the following:
• Push the ignition switch again and
slowly turn it.
• Turn the ignition switch while gently
turning the steering wheel to the left
or right.
Stopping the engine
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ACC.
• you have a Intelligent Key for another
vehicle with you
O Slowly turn the ignition switch after the
key warning light comes on in green. If
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The operating range of the door
lock/unlock function is shown in the illustration.
WARNING
1 59.1 in (1.5 m) from the outside mirrors
j
2 59.1 in (1.5 m) from the rear door
j
When you leave the vehicle, be sure to observe the following:
O
corner pieces
Shift the selector lever to P. (In other positions, the ignition switch will not return
to LOCK.)
O
Securely return the ignition switch to
LOCK.
O
Set the parking brake. Failure to do so
could result in unexpected vehicle movement and could lead to severe injury.
3 31.5 in (80 cm) from the lift gate handle
j
O If you are too close to the door glass,
the Intelligent Key may not operate.
O If the Intelligent Key is in the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who
does not carry the Intelligent Key to
lock/unlock the doors by pushing the
door handle request switch.
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can be used
only when you carry the key with you and
operate as specified in the operating range
inside or outside the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key battery runs down
or where there are strong radio waves or
noise, the operating range may be narrower or the key may be inoperative.
SPA1917
Operating range of the door lock/
unlock function
The outside sensors are in the outside mirrors, rear door corner pieces and the lift
gate.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep
sounds inside and outside the vehicle and
a warning light comes on in the instrument
panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key.
SPA1652
Operating range for engine start
function
The operating range for starting the engine
is inside the vehicle.
O If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument panel, inside the glove box or
door pocket, or the corner of interior
compartment, it may not be possible to
start the engine.
O If the Intelligent Key is near the door or
door glass outside the vehicle, it may
be possible to start the engine.
Alarm and warning when locking
the doors
When the front door warning chime or beep
sounds, check for the following:
O The ignition switch is turned to LOCK.
O The Intelligent Key is not left inside the
vehicle.
SPA2194
Alarm and warning when the
engine stops
When the P position selecting warning light
b in the instrument panel blinks in red:
j
O Doors are closed securely.
O Make sure the selector lever is in the P
position.
O The selector lever is in the P position.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
The door beep sounds for about 2 seconds.
O Make sure the selector lever is in the P
position and the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
If the chime sounds continuously when the
driver’s door is opened, check the following:
O The selector lever is in the P position
and the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK.
O The mechanical key or the valet key is
not inserted into the ignition switch.
O The inside warning chime may stop
when one of the following is performed.
Warning for low battery power
O This warning is to let you know that the
battery of the Intelligent Key will run
down soon. Replace it with a new one.
• The green blinking key warning light
a goes out about 30 seconds after
j
the ignition switch is turned to ON.
O We recommend replacing the battery at
an INFINITI dealer.
• Returning the ignition switch to
LOCK.
Preventing the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle
• Removing the mechanical key or the
valet key.
If you lock all doors using the power door
lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle, all of the doors unlock immediately and the beep sounds to warn you
when the door is closed.
• Closing the doors.
Alarm and warning when the
engine starts
a is blinking
When the key warning light j
in red and the outside buzzer sounds,
make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle.
The buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TROUBLE-SHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom
When pushing the door handle request
switch
The front door beep sounds for approximately 2 seconds
When closing the doors
The front door beep sounds for approximately 10 seconds
The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in red and the front door
warning beep sounds for approximately
3 seconds.
The front door beep sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
When opening the driver’s door
A warning chime sounds continuously
When stopping the engine
The P position warning light in the instrument panel blinks in red.
When turning the ignition switch
The warning chime sounds
When starting the engine
The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in green.
Possible Cause
Remedy
Take out the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle and push the door handle request switch.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK and
push the door handle request switch
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
Close all doors securely and push the
door handle request switch carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.
The doors cannot be locked.
The ignition switch is not turned to LOCK
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
position.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle.
The ignition switch is not in LOCK position, or the mechanical key or valet key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
The selector lever is not in the P position.
The ignition switch is not turned to
LOCK.
The battery charge is low.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you.
Take out the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle and close the door.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Remove the mechanical key or valet key
form the ignition switch.
Make sure that the selector lever is in
the P position.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
Replace the battery to new one. See
“Keyfob battery replacement” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Trouble-shooting examples
When it is difficult to turn the ignition
switch
O Push the ignition switch again and turn
it slowly.
O While gently turning the steering wheel
to the left or right, turn the ignition
switch.
OPERATION WITH INTELLIGENT
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuelfiller door, activate the panic alarm and
open the windows by pushing the buttons
on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional
Intelligent Key, contact an INFINITI dealer.
The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent Key will not operate when:
O the Intelligent Key is too far away from
the vehicle
O the Intelligent Key battery runs down
After locking with the remote control entry
function, pull the door handle to make sure
the doors are securely locked.
The operating range varies depending on
the environment. To securely operate the
lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the door.
The panic alarm will not activate when the
mechanical key or the valet key is in the ignition switch.
SPA1877
How to use remote keyless entry
system
Setting hazard indicator and horn mode:
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and
horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.
The hazard indicator and horn mode also
can be changed with vehicle electronic
systems on the monitor. See “4. Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems”.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
A is pushed, the hazard
the LOCK button j
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Locking doors and fuel-filler door:
1. Remove the mechanical key or the valet
key if any key is in the ignition
switch.*1
2. Close all the doors.*2
A on the Intelli3. Push the LOCK button j
gent Key.
4. All the doors (including lift gate) and
fuel-filler door will lock.
SPA1260
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
B
once. When the UNLOCK button j
is
pushed, the hazard indicator flashes once.
If hazard indicator and horn mode is not
necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the switching
procedure.
In hazard indicator only mode, when the
A is pushed, the hazard indiLOCK button j
cator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK butB is pushed, neither the hazard inditon j
cator nor the horn operates.
(Switching procedure)
A and UNLOCK j
B buttons
Push the LOCK j
on the Intelligent key simultaneously for
more than 2 seconds to switch from one
mode to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator only mode, the hazard indicator
flashes 3 times.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps
once.
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK
A on the Intelligent Key is pushed
button j
even though the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn chirps once.
A is pushed
O When the LOCK button j
with all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
once as a reminder that the doors are
already locked.
*1: Doors lock with the Intelligent Key
while the mechanical key or the valet
key is in the ignition switch or the ignition switch is pushed in.
*2: Doors do not lock with the Intelligent
Key while any door is open.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door:
O the ignition switch is pushed
B on the In1. Push the UNLOCK button j
telligent Key once.
O the mechanical key or the valet key is
inserted into the ignition switch
O The driver’s door and fuel-filler door unlock
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition switch to the ON position or by locking
the doors with the Intelligent Key.
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the
ON position.
O The interior light turns on and the light
timer activates for 30 seconds when the
switch is in the DOOR position with the
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.
B on the In2. Push the UNLOCK button j
telligent Key again within 5 seconds.
O All doors unlock.
O Lift gate unlocks.
O The hazard indicator flashes once if all
doors are completely closed.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute of pressing the UNB .
LOCK button j
O any door is open
C is pushed on the
O The PANIC button j
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
Opening the windows:
See “Opening and closing windows” on the
previous page.
Using the panic alarm:
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
C on the Intel1. Push the PANIC button j
ligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds
with the metal key removed from the ignition key cylinder or the ignition
switch pushed in.
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights
will stay on for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
O It has run for 25 seconds, or
A or the UNLOCK j
B button
O The LOCK j
is pressed, or
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O To install the mechanical key to the Intelligent Key, securely lock the lock
knob and then check that the mechanical key will not move.
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with the
mechanical key installed in it.
SPA1878
OPERATION WITH THE
MECHANICAL KEY AND VALET KEY
If the Intelligent Key cannot be used because its battery is discharged, use the
metal key to lock or unlock the doors and
use the mechanical key or the valet key,
which is registered to the INFINITI Vehicle
Immobilizer System components, to start
the engine.
Removing the mechanical key
O Release the lock knob at the back of the
Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.
Locking/unlocking the doors with
the metal key (mechanical key,
valet key and wallet key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by inserting the metal key into the key cylinder
in the driver’s door in the same way as the
ordinary key.
Starting the engine with the
mechanical key
1. Securely depress the brake pedal.
2. Insert the mechanical key or the valet
key into the ignition switch.
SPA1913
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
start the engine.
4. After starting the engine, release the
knob.
When the engine is off, the steering wheel
lock cannot be unlocked.
For important safety information, see the
“5. Starting and driving” section.
Windows open/close with the
mechanical key
See “Opening and closing windows” on the
previous page.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
HOOD
LIFT GATE
SPA1268B
1 lo1. Pull the hood lock release handle j
cated below the instrument panel; the
hood will then spring up slightly.
2 at the front of the hood
2. Pull the lever j
with your fingertips and raise the hood.
O The power door lock system allows you
to lock or unlock all doors including the
lift gate simultaneously.
WARNING
O
Make sure the hood is completely closed
and latched before driving. Failure to do
so could cause the hood to fly open and
result in an accident.
O
If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
3. When closing the hood, lower it slowly
and make sure it locks into place.
SPA1879
A and pull the
O Push the opener switch j
opener handle to open the lift gate.
WARNING
Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle. See “Precautions
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
when starting and driving” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section for exhaust
gas.
AUTO CLOSURE
If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly
open position, the lift gate will pull itself to
the closed position.
Do not apply excessive force when the
auto closure is operating. Excessive force
applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction.
CAUTION
O
O
The lift gate will automatically close from
a partly open position. To avoid pinching,
keep hands and fingers away from lift
gate opening.
Do not let children operate the lift gate.
O
Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
O
Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle.
SPA1880
Lift gate release lever
If the lift gate cannot be opened with the
door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow the these steps.
A inside of the lift
1. Remove the cover j
gate.
2. Move the lever as illustrated to open
the lift gate.
Contact an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for repair.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
O Push the power door lock switch to the
unlock side.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door and lock
the doors.
SPA1621
OPEN THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the fuel-filler door, unlock it using
one of the following operations, then push
the left-hand side of the lid.
O Push the unlock button on the keyfob or
Intelligent Key once.
O Push the driver’s door handle request
switch once.
O Insert the metal key into the door lock
cylinder and turn the door key clockwise twice.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
matically. Continued refueling may cause
fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and
possibly a fire.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.
Tighten the cap clockwise until ratcheting
clicks are heard.
A on the cap holder
Put the fuel-filler cap j
while refueling.
Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
Use only an original equipment type fuelfiller cap as a replacement. It has a builtin safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in
a serious malfunction and possible inmaljury. It could also cause the
function indicator lamp to come on.
SPA2161
O
Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke
or allow open flames or sparks near the
vehicle when refueling.
O
Do not fill a portable fuel container in the
vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can
cause an explosion of flammable liquid,
vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To
reduce the risk of serious injury or death
when filling portable fuel containers:
— Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with
the container while you are filling it.
O
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap
a quarter of a turn, and wait for any hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel from
spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap.
O
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-
WARNING
O
O
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
— Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
the air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the steering
wheel. Always use the seat belts.
CAUTION
O
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
O
Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the
lamp illuminates because the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The
lamp should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
lamp does not turn off after a few
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected
by an INFINITI dealer.
O
For additional information, see the “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in the
“2.Instruments and controls” section.
SPA1881
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer
to you than is necessary for proper steering
operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag
inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways
or out of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in a crash. You
may also receive serious or fatal injuries from
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SUN VISORS
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
WARNING
Telescopic operation
Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel
forward or backward to the desired position.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
Tilt operation
Push the lever to adjust the steering wheel
up or down to the desired position.
Entry/Exit function
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up automatically. This lets the driver get into and
out of the seat more easily. See “Automatic
drive positioner” later in this section.
SPA2176
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE
MIRROR
CAUTION
O
Do not store the main sun visor before
storing the extension sun visor.
O
Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.
WARNING
Use automatic anti-glare only when necessary because it reduces rear view clarity.
1. To block out glare from the front, swing
1 .
down the main sun visor j
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
2 .
mount and swing it to the side j
3
3. Draw out the extension sun visor j
from the main sun visor to block from
farther glare.
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to
the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
Type A
SPA2195
Type A:
A is in
When the inside MIRROR switch j
B
the ON position (The Auto indicator light j
will illuminate), excessive glare from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you will be
A to
reduced. Push the MIRROR switch j
turn the system off (the indicator light goes
off), and the inside mirror will operate normally.
To turn on the system again, push the MIRROR switch once again.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Type B
SPA2162
For the HomeLink Universal Transceiver
and the compass display, see the description in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Type B:
The outside mirror will operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
The anti-glare system will be automatically
turned on when you turn the ignition switch
to the “ON” position.
Move the switch to right or left to select the
right or left outside mirror, then adjust.
When the system is turned on, the indiB will illuminate and excessive
cator light j
glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.
Defrosting outside mirrors
The outside mirrors will be heated when
the rear window defroster switch is operated.
Push the
switch for 3 seconds to
make the inside mirror operate normally,
and the indicator light will go off. Push the
switch again for 3 seconds to turn the
system on.
Do not hang any object on the mirror or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the
C , resulting in
sensitivity of the sensor j
improper operation.
SPA1449
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the
passenger side are closer than they appear.
Be careful when moving to the right. Using
only this mirror could cause an accident. Use
the inside mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances to other
objects.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
The automatic drive positioner system has
two features:
O Memory storage function
O Entry/exit function
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering
column, and outside mirrors can be stored
in the automatic drive positioner memory.
Follow these procedures to use the
memory system.
MPA0008
Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirrors by pushing them
towards the rear of the vehicle.
SPA2185
1. Apply the parking brake, and set the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional
information, see “Seats” in the “1.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section and
“Steering wheel” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this section.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON.
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)
fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the
switch. After the indicator light goes off,
the selected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).
If a new memory is stored in the same
memory switch, the previous memory will
be deleted.
Linking a keyfob or Intelligent Key
to a stored memory position
A keyfob or Intelligent Key can be linked to
a stored memory position with the following procedure.
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory
position.
2. While the indicator light for the memory
switch being set is illuminated for 5
seconds, press the
button on the
keyfob or Intelligent Key. The indicator
light will blink. After the indicator light
goes off, the keyfob or Intelligent Key is
linked to that memory setting.
With the key removed from the ignition
button on the
switch, press the
keyfob or Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat,
steering wheel and outside mirrors will
move to the memorized position.
Confirming memory storage
O Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
switch. If the main memory has not
been stored, the indicator light will
come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the
position, the indicator light will stay on
for approximately 5 seconds.
O If the battery cable is disconnected, or
if the fuse opens, the memory will be
canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures.
1. Open and close the driver’s door more
than two times with the ignition key in
the LOCK position.
2. Reset the desired position using the
previous procedure.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully
for at least 1 second.
The driver’s seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized
position with the indicator light flashing,
and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s
seat, steering column and door mirrors will
automatically move when the automatic
transmission selector lever is in the P
(Park) position. This allows the driver to get
into and out of the driver’s seat more
easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering wheel will move up:
O When the driver’s door is opened after
removing the key from the ignition
switch or the ignition switch (if so
equipped), or returning the ignition
switch to lock position.
Selecting the memorized position
O When the driver’s door is opened with
the key turned to LOCK.
1. Set the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
O When the key is turned from ACC to
LOCK or returning the ignition switch to
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
lock position with the driver’s door
open.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
O When the key is inserted into the ignition switch or the ignition switch (if so
equipped) is pushed in after closing the
door.
System operation
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
O when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH
(7 km/h).
O When the driver’s door is closed with
the key turned to LOCK.
O when any two or more of the memory
switches are simultaneously pushed
while the automatic drive positioner is
operating.
O When the key or the ignition switch is
turned from ACC to ON with the driver’s
door open.
O when the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or
canceled. See “Vehicle electronic systems”
in the “4. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section of this
manual.
O when the memory switch 1 or 2 is not
pushed for at least 1 second.
Initialize entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will
not work even if it has been set. After reconnecting the battery or replacing the
fuse, open and close the driver’s door several times after inserting the electronic key
into the ignition switch. The entry/exit
function will be activated.
O when the seat has been already moved
to the memorized position.
O when no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
The automatic drive positioner system can
be adjusted and canceled. See “Automatic
seat slide in getting off” and “Lift steering
column when exiting vehicle” in the “4.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section.
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems
Safety note ....................................................... 4-2
How to use INFINITI controller..................... 4-2
Start-up screen (model with Navigation
system) ....................................................... 4-3
Control panel buttons — without navigation
system ............................................................. 4-4
How to use “TRIP” button ............................ 4-5
How to use “FUEL ECON” button ................... 4-5
How to use “E/M” button ............................. 4-5
How to use “MAINT” (Maintenance)
button......................................................... 4-6
Maintenance notice ..................................... 4-6
How to use the “SETTING” button................. 4-8
“DAY/NIGHT” button ................................. 4-11
Outside air temperature............................. 4-11
Control panel buttons — with navigation
system ........................................................... 4-12
How to use the “TRIP” button..................... 4-12
Maintenance notice ................................... 4-14
How to use the “SETTING” button............... 4-15
Rearview monitor (if so equipped) ................... 4-18
How to read the displayed lines ................. 4-19
Adjusting the screen .................................. 4-19
Operating tips ........................................... 4-19
Ventilators...................................................... 4-20
Heater and air conditioner (Automatic)............. 4-21
Automatic operation .................................. 4-22
Manual operation ...................................... 4-23
Operating tips ........................................... 4-23
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) ........... 4-24
Servicing air conditioner ................................. 4-24
Audio system.................................................. 4-25
FM radio reception..................................... 4-25
AM radio reception .................................... 4-26
Satellite radio reception
(if so equipped) ......................................... 4-26
Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-27
FM-AM-satellite radio with compact disc
(CD) changer ............................................. 4-34
CD care and cleaning ................................. 4-39
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) ......................................... 4-40
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with
INFINITI voice recognition (if so equipped)...... 4-41
Using the system ....................................... 4-43
Control buttons ......................................... 4-45
Getting started .......................................... 4-45
List of voice commands.............................. 4-47
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode...................
Troubleshooting guide...............................
INFINITI mobile entertainment system (MES)
(if so equipped) ..............................................
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls ......
Remote control ..........................................
Remote control holder ...............................
4-53
4-54
4-55
4-56
4-56
4-57
Flip-down screen .......................................
Playing a digital video disc (DVD) ...............
Care and maintenance ...............................
How to handle the DVD ..............................
Antenna ....................................................
Car phone or CB radio ....................................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4-57
4-58
4-62
4-62
4-64
4-65
SAFETY NOTE
WARNING
O
Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order
that full attention may be given to the
driving operation.
O
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
O
Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
O
In case you notice any foreign objects in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or
notice smoke or smell coming from it,
stop using the system immediately and
contact an INFINITI dealer. Ignoring
such conditions may lead to accident,
fire, or electric shock.
With Navigation system
SAA1097
HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER
Choose an item on the display using the
2 (or additional
main directional buttons j
6 with Navigation sysdirectional buttons j
3 , and push the ENTER
tem) or center dial j
1 for operation.
” button j
“
SAA1098
Without Navigation system
After the setup is completed, push the
4 and return to the
” button j
BACK “
previous screen.
5 functions, refer
For the “VOICE” button j
to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
4 beIf you push the BACK “
” button j
fore the setup is completed, the setup will
be canceled and/or the display will return
to the previous screen.
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the
separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
SAA1382
START-UP SCREEN (model with
Navigation system)
When you push the ignition switch to the
ACC or ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP
warning is displayed on the screen. When
you read and agree with the warning, push
the ENTER “
” button.
If you do not push the ENTER “
” button, you will not be able to use the NAVI
system.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHOUT
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
10. “TRIP RESET” button
11. “FUEL ECON” button
12. “SETTING” button
Make sure the engine is running before using this system.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
SAA1383
1, 2, 7, 9, 13.
For audio system control
button (See “AUDIO
SYSTEM” later in this section.)
3. “TRIP” button
4. INFINITI controller
5. “DAY/NIGHT” button
6. “MAINT” maintenance button
8. “E/M” button
4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
HOW TO USE “E/M” BUTTON
You can change the unit as follows using
the “E/M” (English/Metric) button.
Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
SAA1384
SAA1385
HOW TO USE “TRIP” BUTTON
HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON” BUTTON
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen.
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to
Empty will be displayed for reference when
the “FUEL ECON” button is pushed.
TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) → TRIP 2 (TIME,
DIST, AVG) → OFF
Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average Speed will be displayed.
To reset, select the “Reset” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
“
” button, or push the “TRIP
RESET” or “TRIP” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.
To reset, select the “Reset” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
“
” button, or push the “TRIP
RESET” or “TRIP” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SAA1386
HOW TO USE “MAINT”
(Maintenance) BUTTON
Maintenance and tire pressure information
(if so equipped) will be displayed when the
“MAINT” button is pushed.
To display the setting of the maintenance
interval, select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key using the INFINITI controller
and push the ENTER “
” button.
SAA1387
To reset the maintenance interval, select
the “Reset” key using the INFINITI control” button.
ler and push the ENTER “
To display the MAINTENANCE NOTICE, automatically when setting trip distance is
reached, select the “Display Maintenance
Notification” key and push the ENTER
“
” button.
To set the maintenance interval, select the
“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the
INFINITI controller and move the INFINITI
controller to the right or left.
SAA1354
MAINTENANCE NOTICE
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“ENGINE OIL” or “TIRE ROTATION”) will be automatically displayed as shown when both
of the following conditions are met:
O the vehicle is driven the set distance
and the ignition switch is turned OFF.
O the ignition key is turned ON the next
time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the
“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, push the BACK “
” button.
4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays each time the key is turned ON until
one of the following conditions are met:
In case of low tire pressure, a message
(FLAT TIRE or CHECK ALL TIRE) is displayed
on the screen:
O “RESET” is selected.
FLAT TIRE — Check all tires.
O “Display Maintenance Notification” is
set OFF.
WARNING
O the maintenance interval is set again.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
SAA1398
Tire pressure information (if so
equipped)
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen
indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed
on the screen does not correspond with the
actual order of the tire position.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling
condition and the temperature.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Display Off:
To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and
“Display Off” key. The indicator of the “Display Off” will turn on. When any mode
button is pushed with the screen off, the
screen turns on for further operation. The
screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds
after the operation is finished.
To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and
“Display Off” key, then set the screen to on
by pushing the ENTER “
” button.
SAA1355
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”
BUTTON
The SETTINGS screen will appear when the
“SETTING” button is pushed.
SAA1356
“Display” settings
The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear
when selecting the “Display” key and
pushing the ENTER “
” button.
Brightness/Contrast/Screen Background:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness/
Contrast/Screen Background” key and
push the ENTER “
” button. Then
you can adjust the brightness to Darker or
Brighter, the contrast to Lower or Higher
using the INFINITI controller.
Setting Audio or HVAC display:
Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and
air conditioner) key to be displayed at the
bottom, by using the INFINITI controller.
The audio or HVAC (heater, air conditioner)
setting condition will normally appear on
the screen.
To return to the setting screen, push the
“SETTING” button or BACK “
” button.
4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SAA1357
Vehicle electronic systems
The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen
will appear when selecting the “Vehicle
Electronic Systems” key with the INFINITI
controller and pushing the ENTER
“
” button.
You can set the various electronic systems
operating conditions.
To set an operating condition, select the
applicable item using the INFINITI controller, and push the ENTER “
” button.
The indicator light alternately turns on and
off each time the ENTER “
”
SAA1416
SAA1417
Keyless Remote Response — Horn*:
button is pushed.
Indicator light is illuminated. — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated. — OFF
Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:
The driver’s seat automatically moves back
and returns to the original position for ease
of exit and entry.
Selective door unlock:
This key can switch the unlock doors of the
1st unlocking operation as follows:
ON (Only the driver side door) ←→ OFF (All
the doors)
This key changes the horn chirp mode that
occurs when pushing the “LOCK” button on
the keyfob or the Intelligent Key.
Keyless Remote Response — Lights*:
This key changes the hazard indicator flash
mode that occurs when pushing the
“LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the keyfob
or the Intelligent Key.
* Even if you change the horn chirp or the
hazard flash with the keyfob or the Intelligent Key, the change may not be re-
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
flected in the display. Use the keyfob or
the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode.
Auto Re-Lock Time:
The length of the auto door re-lock time can
be set. Select the “Auto Re-Lock Time” key,
then move the INFINITI controller and
push the ENTER “
” button to adjust
the time.
Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights:
Automatic light illumination can be set as
desired.
Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights” key, then move the INFINITI controller to the left (lower) or right (higher).
Automatic Headlights Off Delay:
You can control how long it takes the automatic turn off timer to extinguish the headlights in the AUTO position.
Intelligent Key Lock Response — Sound
(if so equipped):
The sound pattern of the Intelligent request switch operation can be set as desired. Select the “Intelligent Key lock response — Sound” key, then push the
ENTER “
” button to change the
sound pattern.
Intelligent Key Unlock Response — Beep
Sound (if so equipped):
The beep sounds when unlocking door with
the Intelligent request switch can be
turned on or off.
Return All Settings to Default:
When this key is selected and turned on
using the ENTER “
” button, all settings made by VEHICLE ELECTRONICS will
return to the initial conditions.
Select the “Automatic Headlights Off
Delay” key, then move the INFINITI controller to the left or right to adjust the timer.
Speed Dependent Wiper:
When this item is turned to on, the wiper
interval is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.
SAA1388
System settings
Language/Unit:
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear
when selecting the “Language/Unit” key
and pushing the ENTER “
” button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
You can select the language and unit using
the INFINITI controller and ENTER
“
” button.
4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
“DAY/NIGHT” BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push the
“DAY/NIGHT” button. Pushing the button
again will change the display to DAY or
NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness
moving the INFINITI controller right or left.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds,
or if the BACK “
” button is pushed,
the display will return to the previous display.
Pushing the “DAY/NIGHT” button for more
than approximately 1.5 seconds will turn
the display off. The screen will change to
“CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO”.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The outside air temperature is displayed in
°F or °C.
It may differ from the actual outside air
temperature due to the sensor location.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTON
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen.
Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP
1 → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE.
SAA1399
1, 2, 3, 10, 11. For Navigation system control buttons; refer to the
separate
Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
5. “DAY/NIGHT” button
6. “TRIP” button
7, 8, 9, 13. For audio system control buttons; refer to “AUDIO SYSTEM”
later in this section.
12. “SETTING” button
4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SAA1384
SAA1385
SAA1386
“TRIP” information
“FUEL ECONOMY” information
“MAINTENANCE” information
Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average Speed will be displayed.
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to
Empty will be displayed for reference.
You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation interval.
To reset, select the “Reset” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
“
” button or push the “TRIP”
button for more than approximately 1.5
seconds.
To reset, select the “Reset” key using the
INFINITI controller and push the ENTER
“
” button or push the “TRIP”
button for more than approximately 1.5
seconds.
And the tire pressure will appear on the
screen (if the tire pressure system is
equipped).
To display the setting of the maintenance
interval, select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key using the INFINITI controller
and push the ENTER “
” button.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays each time the key is turned ON until
one of the following conditions are met:
O “RESET” is selected.
O “Display Maintenance Notification” is
set OFF.
O the maintenance interval is set again.
SAA1387
To set the maintenance interval, select the
“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the
INFINITI controller and move the INFINITI
controller to the right or left.
To reset the maintenance interval, select
the “Reset” key using the INFINITI controller and push the ENTER “
” button.
To display the MAINTENANCE NOTICE, automatically when setting trip distance is
reached, select the “Display Maintenance
Notification” key and push the ENTER
“
” button.
SAA1354
MAINTENANCE NOTICE
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“ENGINE OIL” or “TIRE ROTATION”) will be automatically displayed as shown when both
of the following conditions are met:
O the vehicle is driven the set distance
and the ignition switch is turned OFF.
O the ignition key is turned ON the next
time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the
“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, push the BACK “
” button.
4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The order of tire pressure figures displayed
on the screen does not correspond with the
actual order of the tire position.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling
condition and the temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is
displayed on the screen:
FLAT TIRE — Check all tires.
WARNING
SAA1398
O
Tire pressure information (if so
equipped)
To view “TIRE PRESSURE” information,
push the “TRIP” button repeatedly until the
“MAINTENANCE” screen is displayed. Select “TIRE PRESSURE” using the INFINITI
controller and push the ENTER “
”
button.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
SAA1322
* — Refer to the separate Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”
BUTTON
The SETTINGS screen will appear when the
“SETTING” button is pushed.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen
indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The Map Background is related to the navigation system. Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Display Off:
SAA1323
“Display” settings
To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and
“Display Off” key. The indicator of the “Display Off” will turn on. When any mode
button is pushed with the screen off, the
screen turns on for further operation. The
screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds
after the operation is finished on the map
display in the Audio, HVAC (Heater and air
conditioner).
The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear
when selecting the “Display” key and
pushing the ENTER “
” button.
To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and
“Display Off” key, then set the screen to on
” button.
by pushing the ENTER “
Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:
Setting Audio or HVAC display:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness/
Contrast/Map Background” key and push
the ENTER “
” button. Then you can
adjust the brightness to Darker or Brighter,
the contrast to Lower or Higher using the
INFINITI controller.
Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and
air conditioner) key to be displayed at the
bottom, by using the INFINITI controller.
The audio or HVAC (heater, air conditioner)
setting condition will normally appear on
the screen.
To return to the setting screen, push the
“SETTING” button or BACK “
” button.
SAA1390
Vehicle electronic systems
The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen
will appear when selecting the “Vehicle
Electronic Systems” key with the INFINITI
controller and pushing the ENTER
“
” button.
You can set the various electronic systems
operating conditions.
To set an operating condition, select the
applicable item using the INFINITI controller, and push the ENTER “
” button.
The indicator light alternately turns on and
off each time the ENTER “
”
4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
“LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the keyfob
or the Intelligent Key.
* Even if you change the horn chirp or the
hazard flash with the keyfob or the Intelligent Key, the change may not be reflected in the display. Use the keyfob or
the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode.
Auto Re-Lock Time:
SAA1391
button is pushed.
Indicator light is illuminated. — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated. — OFF
Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:
The driver’s seat automatically moves back
and returns to the original position for ease
of exit and entry.
Lift steering column when exiting vehicle:
The steering column automatically tilts up
and returns to the original position for exceptional ease of entry and exit.
SAA1392
The length of the auto door re-lock time can
be set. Select the “Auto Re-Lock Time” key,
then move the INFINITI controller and
push the ENTER “
” button to adjust
the time.
Selective door unlock:
Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights:
This key can switch the unlock doors of the
1st unlocking operation as follows:
Automatic light illumination can be set as
desired.
ON (Only the driver side door) ←→ OFF (All
the doors)
Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights” key, then move the INFINITI controller to the left (lower) or right (higher).
Keyless Remote Response — Horn*:
This key changes the horn chirp mode that
occurs when pushing the “LOCK” button on
the keyfob or the Intelligent Key.
Keyless Remote Response — Lights*:
Automatic Headlights Off Delay:
You can control how long it takes the automatic turn off timer to extinguish the headlights in the AUTO position.
This key changes the hazard indicator flash
mode that occurs when pushing the
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
Select the “Automatic Headlights Off
Delay” key, then move the INFINITI controller to the left or right to adjust the timer.
When the selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display
shows view to the rear of the vehicle.
Speed Dependent Wiper:
The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects
to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The
system will not detect small objects below
the bumper, and may not detect objects
close to the bumper or on the ground.
When this item is turned to on, the wiper
interval is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.
Intelligent Key Lock Response — Sound
(if so equipped):
The sound pattern of the Intelligent request switch operation can be set as desired. Select the “Intelligent Key lock response — Sound” key, then push the
ENTER“
” button to change the
sound pattern.
Intelligent Key Unlock Response — Beep
Sound (if so equipped):
The beep sounds when unlocking door with
the Intelligent request switch can be
turned on or off.
Return All Settings to Default:
When this key is selected and turned on
using the ENTER “
” button, all settings made by VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS will return to the initial conditions.
CAUTION
SAA1388
O
The rearview camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and check that it is
safe to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
O
Objects viewed in the rearview monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the
rearview monitor will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the rearview
and outside mirrors.
O
Make sure that the lift gate is securely
closed when backing up.
System settings
Language/Unit:
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear
when selecting the “Language/Unit” key
and pushing the ENTER “
” button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
You can select the language and unit using
the INFINITI controller and ENTER
“
” button.
4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
O
O
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.
Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed
beside the license plate light.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to
“HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” BUTTON” in
this section.
When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision
instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire
or an electric shock.
O
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
O
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from it.
OPERATING TIPS
O When the selector lever is shifted to R,
the display screen automatically
changes to the rearview monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
SAA0889
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance
and distances to objects with reference to
A are displayed on the
the bumper line j
monitor.
They are indicated as reference distances
to objects. Displayed lines indicate dis1 , 3 feet (yellow) j
2 ,
tances 1.5 feet (red) j
3 and 10 feet (green) j
4
7 feet (green) j
[0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green) and 3
m (green)] from the lower part of the
A .
bumper line j
O It may take some time for the rearview
monitor to display after the selector
lever has been shifted to R. Objects
may be distorted momentarily. When
the selector lever is returned to a position other than R, it may take some time
for the screen to change. Objects on the
screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
O When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects. This is not a malfunction.
O When strong light directly enters the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
VENTILATORS
O Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is
not a malfunction.
O The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.
O The colors of objects on the rear view
monitor may differ somewhat from
those of the actual object.
O When the contrast of objects is low at
night, pushing the ENTER “
”
button may not change the brightness.
O Objects on the monitor may not be clear
in a dark place or at night.
O If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the
camera, the rear view monitor may not
clearly display objects. Clean the
camera.
O To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.
SAA0708A
Front
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are closed.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are open.
O Do not use body wax on the camera
window. Wipe off any wax with a clean
cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.
4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Rear — side
SAA0709A
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(Automatic)
7. “OFF” button for climate control system
” rear window defroster button;
8. “
refer to the “2. Instrument and controls” section.
9. Fan speed control button
10. “
” intake air control button
11. “DUAL” passenger side temperature
control “ON/OFF” button
SAA1393
1. Temperature control button (driver only,
or driver and passenger)
2. “AUTO” climate control “ON” button
3. “
” front defroster button
4. “A/C” air conditioner “ON/OFF” button
5. “MODE” manual air flow control button
6. Temperature control button (passenger
side)
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O
O
O
O
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals. Do not
leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others in
your vehicle. Unattended pets should
also not be left alone.
Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done
while driving, so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
on. To turn off the passenger side temperature control, push the “DUAL”
button.
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be normally used all year
round as the system automatically works to
keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled
automatically.
1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (AUTO will
be displayed.)
2. Push the temperature set button to set
the desired temperature.
O Adjust the temperature to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
O The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
3. You can individually set driver and front
passenger side temperature using each
temperature control button. When the
“DUAL” button is pushed or passenger
side temperature control button is
turned, the DUAL indicator will come
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Push the “A/C” button. (A/C OFF will be
displayed and A/C indicator will turn
off.)
2. Push the temperature set button to set
the desired temperature.
O The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
O Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise
the system may not work properly.
O Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Push the “
” FRONT defroster
button on. (The indicator light on the
button will come on.)
4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
2. Push the temperature set button to set
the desired temperature.
O To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, push the fan speed
control button “
” and set to the
maximum position.
O As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “AUTO” button
to return to the auto mode.
O When the “
” front defroster button
is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to defog
the windshield, and the air recirculate
mode will automatically be turned off.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment to improve the defogging
performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Push the fan control button “
manually control the fan speed.
” to
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation
Air flow control
Push the intake air control button
“
” to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the “
” side will come on.
Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control button selects the air outlet to:
The air recirculation mode cannot be
activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode “
”.
Fresh air
Push the button “
” to draw outside air into the passenger compartment.
The indicator light on the “
” side will
come on.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually control the intake air, push the intake air control “
” . To return to the automatic control mode, push the intake air
control button for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh
air buttons) will flash twice, and then the
intake air will be controlled automatically.
:
Air flows from center and side ventilators.
:
Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.
:
Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
:
Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
To turn the system off
Push the “OFF” button.
OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air
flow from the foot outlets may not operate
for a maximum of 150 seconds. However,
this is not a malfunction. After the coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow from
the foot outlets will operate normally.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog
up easily when operating the heater or air
conditioning system.
SAA0642B
A on the instrument panel
The sensor j
helps maintain a constant temperature; do
not put anything on or around this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
The air conditioning system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter which collects
dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure the air
conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates
efficiently, replace the filter in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in the
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”. To replace the filter, contact an
INFINITI dealer.
The air conditioning system in your INFINITI
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This
refrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. However, special charging equipment
and lubricants are required when servicing
your INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
severe damage to your air conditioning system. See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.
An INFINITI dealer will be able to service
your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal
injury, any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician with
proper equipment.
4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
AUDIO SYSTEM
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and
press the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned
to the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station
signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and
other external influences. Intermittent
changes in reception quality normally are
caused by these external influences.
Remember that a moving vehicle is not the
ideal place to listen to a radio. Because of
the movement, reception conditions will
constantly change. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other
vehicles can work against ideal reception.
Described below are some of the factors
that can affect your radio reception.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
SAA0306C
Radio reception
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Your radio system is equipped with stateof-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25
to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural
(single channel) FM having slightly more
range than stereo FM. External influences
may sometimes interfere with FM station
reception even if the FM station is within 25
miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light.
For example they will reflect off objects.
However there are some general characteristics of FM, AM and satellite radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
area, and do not indicate any malfunction
in your radio system.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position, usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control counterclockwise to reduce treble
response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct
and reflected signals reach the receiver at
the same time. The signals may cancel
each other, resulting in momentary flutter
or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics.
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
Do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is first installed or
the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a
malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes
with satellite radio ON for satellite radio to
receive all of the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available unless optional satellite receiver and antenna
are
installed
and
an
XM
or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska
and Hawaii.
4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
O Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
Compact Disc (CD) player
O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or
that have pin holes may not work properly.
O During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
O The following CDs may not work properly:
O The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
• Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
• Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
O The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
• Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
O Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction.
• 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
• CDs that are not round
• CDs with a paper label
SAA0480
O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12
cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the
disc or packaging.
• CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
O CDs with MP3 or WMA format cannot
be written in this audio system.
O If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHECK DISC:
• Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
• Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PUSH EJECT:
This is a malfunction due to excessive
temperature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pushing the “EJECT” button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD. The
CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
Compact Disc (CD) with MP3 or
WMA
Explanation of terms:
O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files.
MP3 conversion of an audio track from
CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when compared
to MP3s at the same level of quality.
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
O Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
O Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
O ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3 tag is the part
of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital
music file such as song title, artist,
album title, encoding bit rate, track
time duration, etc. ID3 tag information
is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track
title line on the display.
*
Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O The names of folders not containing
MP3/WMA files are not shown in the
display.
O If there is a file in the top level of the
disc, “ROOT” is displayed.
O The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing
software. Therefore, the files might not
play in the desired order.
SAA1025
Playback order:
Playback order of the CD with compressed
files (MP3/WMA) is as illustrated above.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MP3
Supported versions*
WMA
*
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency
8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency
32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder),
Files: 512
Text character number limitation
128 characters
Displayable character codes
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16
BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big
Endian), 05: (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM
Little Endian)
Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate
cannot be played.
4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Cannot play
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the
player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number
of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Poor sound quality
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
The bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.
If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the
music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Move immediately to the next song
when playing.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the
desired order.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
9. “SEEK/APS REW” button
10. “APS FF/TRACK CHANGE” button
11. “CD EJECT” button
12. “PAUSE/MUTE” button
13. POWER ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob
14. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD
insert/eject or CD play select button
15. TUNE knob, FOLDER select and AUDIO
(BASS, TREBLE, FADE, and BALANCE,
SSV and NR (Dolby)) knob
*: No satellite radio reception is available
unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription is active.
SAA1394
Without Navigation system
1. “RPT (Repeat)zRDM (Random)” button
5. “RADIO” FM-AM-SAT band select button
2. “SCAN” button
6. “CDzDVD” play button
3. “CD LOAD” button
7. CD slot
4. “A.B.C.” preset select button
8. “DISP (Display)” button
4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
9. “CD EJECT” button
10. “RPT (Repeat) RDM (Random)” play
button
11. “SCAN” button
12. “POWER
knob
ONzOFF/VOLUME”
control
13. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD
insert/eject or CD play select button
14. TUNE knob, FOLDER select and AUDIO
(BASS, TREBLE, FADE, and BALANCE,
SSV and NR (Dolby)) knob
*: No satellite radio reception is available
unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription is active.
1. “CD LOAD” button
SAA1395
With Navigation system
5. CD slot
2. “A.B.C.” preset select button
6. “DISP (Display)” button
3. “RADIO” FM-AM-SAT band select button
7. “SEEK/APS REW” button
4. “CD/DVD” play button
8. “APS FF/TRACK CHANGE” button
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing to the XM or
SIRIUSTM satellite radio provider. After receiving the activation signal, an available
channel list will be automatically updated
in the radio. For XM , turn the ignition
switch from the LOCK to ACC position to update the channel list.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska
and Hawaii.
FM-AM-SATELLITE RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
Audio main operation
Head unit:
The radio has an FM diversity reception
system, which employs an antenna printed
on the rear window. This system automatically switches to the antenna which is receiving less interference.
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low
frequency range automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
POWER on/off:
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, and then push the “POWER”
on/off button while the system is off to call
up the mode (radio, CD or DVD) which was
playing immediately before the system was
turned off. When no CD or DVD is loaded,
the radio will come on. While the system is
on, pushing the “POWER” on/off button
turns the system off.
Volume control:
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive control
Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume
changes as the driving speed changes.
AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, SSV):
Push the AUDIO knob to change the selecting mode as follows.
BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE →
SSV → (Normal) → BASS
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fader and Balance,
push the AUDIO knob until the desired
mode BASS, TREBLE, FADE or BALANCE appears in the display. Turn the AUDIO knob
to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade or Balance.
Fade adjusts the sound level between the
front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID
or HIGH, turn the AUDIO knob.
After 10 seconds, the radio, or CD display
reappears. Once the sound quality is set to
the desired level, push the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio, or CD display appears.
DISPLAY CHANGE:
This button will work during FM radio, satellite radio (if so equipped) and CD operation. Find the detailed function in the description of each item.
Pause/mute button (if so
equipped):
To mute or pause the audio sound, push
the “PAUSE/MUTE” button.
To release the mute or pause, push the
button again.
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
RADIO (FM/AM/SAT) band select:
Pushing the
band select button will
change the band as follows:
(Without satellite radio)
AM → FM → AM
4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
(With satellite radio)
AM → FM → SAT (XM/SR) → AM
No satellite radio reception is available unless optional satellite receiver and antenna
are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska
and Hawaii.
When the RADIO band select button is
pushed while the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the radio will come on
at the station last played.
The last station/channel played will also
come on when the ONzOFF/VOL control
knob is pushed to ON.
If another audio source is playing when the
“RADIO” button is turned to ON, the other
audio source will automatically be turned
off and the last radio station played will
come on.
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE (Tuning):
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving
so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
O For AM and FM radio
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual
tuning.
O For satellite radio
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek
channels from all of the categories
when any CAT is not selected.
SEEK tuning:
from high to low or low to high frequencies and to stop at each broadcasting
station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 second period will stop SEEK tuning and the radio
will remain turned to that station.
O For satellite radio
After selecting a CAT name, push the
or
to
“SEEK/TRACK” button
seek the next or previous channel in the
selected category. To seek the first
channels listed in each category, push
the “SEEK/TRACK” button
or
before selecting a CAT name.
To cancel the CAT mode, push the BACK
“
” button on the INFINITI controller.
SCAN tuning:
O For AM and FM radio
Push the “SEEK/TRACK” button
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune
from high to low or low to high frequencies and to stop at each broadcasting
station for 5 seconds. Pushing the
button again during this 5 second period will stop SEEK tuning and the radio
will remain turned to that station. Push
the “SEEK/TRACK” button
or
for more than 1.5 seconds to tune
Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from
low to high frequencies and stops at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds.
Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop “SCAN” tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station.
If the “SCAN” tuning button is not pushed
within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to
the next station.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
PRESET select:
Push the “PRESET” select button to go to
the next PRESET. After choosing from the
PRESET A, B or C, you can select the desired channel using the INFINITI controller or pushing the station preset buttons
to
.
to
Station memory
operations:
Six stations/channels can be set for
PRESET A, B and C. The PRESET A, B and C
function allows you to store a combination
of FM, AM and SAT (if so equipped) stations
for easy access.
1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using
the preset select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using the
“SEEK”, “SCAN” or “TUNE” button.
3. Select the desired station/channel and
keep pushing any of the desired station
preset buttons
to
until a
beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pushed.)
4. The channel indicator will then come on
and the sound will resume. Memorizing
is now complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse blows, the radio memory will be
erased. In that case, reset the desired stations.
DISPLAY:
O By pushing the “DISP” button for more
than 1.5 seconds while receiving FM radio waves, “PS NAME” switches between ON and OFF.
O Pushing the “DISP” button will display
additional information about the satellite radio broadcast (for example: Artist
name, Title).
Keep pushing the “DISP” button, and it
will change the information of the satellite radio broadcast to be displayed as
follows:
CH Number → CH Name → Artist Name
→ Song Title → CH Number
2. Select the desired station/channel and
keep pushing any of the desired station
preset buttons (1 to 6) until a beep
sound is heard. (The radio mutes when
the select button is pushed.)
3. The channel indicator will then come on
and the sound will resume. Memorizing
is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse blows, the preset station memory
will be erased. In that case, reset the desired stations.
CATEGORY (CAT):
1. CAT selection mode
CAT name selection can be done by
turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob in the
CAT selection mode or by using the
INFINITI controller when the CAT list is
displayed on the screen.
Station memory operations:
Six stations/channels can be set for the FM
band, six for satellite radio (if so equipped)
and six stations can be set for the AM band.
1. Tune to the desired station using the
“SEEK”, “SCAN” or “TUNE” button.
4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To scan the first channels listed in each
category, push the “SEEK/TRACK”
or
for more than 1.5
button
seconds before entering the CAT select
mode.
4. Information screen
2. CAT SEEK tuning mode
After selecting a CAT name, push the
“SEEK/TRACK” button
or
to
seek the next or previous channel in the
selected category.
To seek the first channels listed in each
category, push the “SEEK/TRACK”
button
or
before entering the
CAT select mode.
To cancel the CAT mode, push the BACK
“
” button on the INFINITI controller.
3. CAT SCAN tuning mode
After selecting a CAT name, push the
“SEEK/TRACK” button for more than 1.5
seconds to scan channels in the selected category, and stop at each channel for 5 seconds. Pushing the button
again during this 5 second period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
The following notices will be displayed
under certain conditions.
into the slot and start playing. To insert the
disc, first push the “LOAD” button.
After loading the disc, the number of tracks
on the disc and the play time will appear on
the display.
If the radio or tape is already operating, it
will automatically turn off and the compact
disc will play.
CAUTION
O NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while
the SAT tuner is connected.)
O OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)
O ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection
error)
O LOADING(XM)/ACQUIRING(SR) (When
the initial setting is performed)
O UPDATING(XM)/CALL XXXX(SR) (When
the satellite radio subscription is not
active)
O INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)
Compact disc (CD) changer
operation
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position and insert the compact disc into
the slot with the label side facing up. The
compact disc will be guided automatically
Do not force the compact disc into the slot.
This could damage the player.
If the system has been turned off while the
compact disc was playing, pushing the
ONzOFF/VOL control knob will start the
compact disc.
CD LOAD button:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the
“
” button for less than 1.5 seconds.
Select the loading slot by pushing the CD
insert select button (1 to 6), then insert the
CD.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the
“
” button for more than 1.5 seconds.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The inserted slot numbers will illuminate
on the display.
CD PLAY selection:
CD:
To change to another CD already loaded
into the player, push the CD play select
CD PLAY:
When the “CDzDVD” button is pushed with
the system off and the CD loaded in the CD
changer, the CD changer or the rear INFINITI mobile entertainment system (if so
equipped) will start to play.
CD with MP3 or WMA:
SCAN tuning:
Pushing the “CDzDVD” button changes operations alternately as follows:
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind)/APS (Automatic
Program Search) FF, APS
REW:
CD → DVD → CD
When the “CDzDVD” button is pushed with
the CD loaded with another audio source
playing, the other source will automatically
be turned off and
O the CD will start to play if the last play
was a CD.
O the DVD will start to play if the last play
was a DVD.
DISPLAY:
When the display button is pushed for
more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
being played, the music information displayed can be changed in the following
order.
to
or choose a disc disbuttons
played on the screen using the INFINITI
controller.
When the “SCAN” tuning button is pushed
for less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
being played, the beginning of all the CD
programs in each track will be played for
10 seconds in sequence.
When the “
” (rewind) or “
” (fast
forward) button is pushed for more than
1.5 seconds while the compact disc is
being played, the compact disc will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
will return to normal play speed.
When the “SCAN” tuning button is pushed
for more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is
being played, the first program in all the
CDs will be played for 10 seconds.
When the “
” or “
” button is
pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is being played, the next
track or the beginning of the current track
on the CD will be played.
If the “SCAN” tuning button is not pushed
within 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to
the next disc program.
The INFINITI controller can also be used to
select tracks when a CD is being played.
When the “RPTzRDM” play button is pushed
while the compact disc is played, the play
pattern can be changed as follows:
Pushing the button again during this 10
second period will stop SCAN tuning.
REPEAT (RPT)zRANDOM (RDM):
4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
no DVD discs loaded will turn on the MES
(mute).
The sound resumes when a DVD disc is
loaded or another audio source is connected to the auxiliary input jacks.
CD EJECT:
When the “CD EJECT” button is pushed with
the compact disc loaded, the compact disc
will be ejected.
To eject the discs selected by the “EJECT”
button, push it for less than 1.5 seconds.
To eject all the discs, push the “EJECT” button for more than 1.5 seconds.
If the compact disc comes out and is not
removed, it will be pulled back into the slot
to protect it.
DVD OFF function:
It is possible to turn off the INFINITI Mobile Entertainment System (MES) from the
front seat. When the ON-OFF switch is
pushed when the DVD is being played from
the speakers (with DVD displayed), the
MES is turned off. (The audio system will
not turn off. If a CD is loaded, the CD will be
played.) Pushing the “CDzDVD” button with
SAA0451
CD CARE AND CLEANING
O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend the
disc.
O Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O A new disc may be rough on its inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges using the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VOLUME control switch
POWER on/off switch
MODE select switch
Tuning switch
POWER on/MODE select switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
POWER on/off switch
Type A
SAA0974
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC
or ON position, push the POWER switch to
turn the audio system on or off.
MODE select switch
Push the MODE select switch to change the
mode in the sequence of AM, FM, SAT (if so
equipped) and CD.
Pushing this switch also turns the audio
system on when it is off.
POWER on/MODE select switch (if
so equipped)
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC
or ON position, push the POWER on/MODE
select switch to turn the audio system on.
4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Type B
SAA1349
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Push the switch to change the mode in the
sequence of AM, FM, SAT and CD.
VOLUME control switch
Push up/down the VOLUME control switch
to increase or decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
Memory change (radio):
Push up/down the tuning switch
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to change
the radio frequency.
SEEK tuning (radio):
Push up/down the tuning switch
or
for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the
next or previous radio station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
REW (CD):
interval between programs, the system
may not stop in the desired or expected location.
FOLDER change (CD with MP3/WMA):
BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION (if
so equipped)
WARNING
O
Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
O
If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop your vehicle
before doing so.
or
Push up/down the tuning switch
for more than 1.5 seconds to change
the folders (if it has folders).
Push up/down the tuning switch
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to return to
the beginning of the present program or
skip to the next program.
DISC change (CD without MP3/WMA):
Push up/down the tuning switch
or
for more than 1.5 seconds to change
the playing disc up or down.
CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
phone after starting the engine.
Push up/down the tuning switch
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to return to
the beginning of the present program or
skip to the next program. Push several
times to skip back or skip through programs.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank
interval within one program or there is no
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
phone is automatically connected with the
in-vehicle phone module when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with the
paired cellular phone turned on and carried
in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone
module. However, you can talk on only one
cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
O Set up the wireless connection between
a cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
O Some Bluetooth
enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list.
SAA1396
Your INFINITI is equipped with the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If
you are an owner of a Bluetooth enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
O You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone
connecting procedure is required. Your
4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground
parking garage, near a tall building
or in a mountainous area.
— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular
phone may discharge quicker than usual.
If the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone
System seems to be malfunctioning,
please refer to “Troubleshooting guide”
later in this section. You can also visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 8 inch (20 cm) between
the radiator and your body. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating
in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
USING THE SYSTEM
The INFINITI Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is
initialized, which takes a few seconds.
When completed, the amber light on the
overhead console illuminates and the
system is ready to accept voice commands.
If the “
” button is pushed before the
initialization completes, the system will
announce “Hands-free phone system not
ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
INFINITI Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
O Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to
eliminate surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.
O Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-43
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O Start speaking a command within 5
seconds after the tone sounds.
O Speak in a natural voice without
pausing between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,
push and release the “
” button located on the steering wheel. The light on
the overhead console flashes to signal you
have entered a voice recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
O You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can also push the
” button on the steering wheel at
“
any time. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
O If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or −) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
How to say numbers
O If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat
them.
INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the rules and examples below.
O If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not recognized. Please try again.” Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
O Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.
O If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” anytime the system is
waiting for a response.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
O Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight hundred six six two six
two oh oh”,
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two
sixty two hundred, and
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty
two hundred.
O Numbers can be spoken in small
groups. The system will prompt you to
continuing entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight oh oh”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six two oh oh”
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two
oh oh”, or
— “One eight zero zero six six two six
two oh oh”
O You can say “Star” for * and “Pound”
for # at anytime in any position of the
phone number.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
— “One five five five one two one two
star one two three”
MODE/PHONE END
Push the “
” button to cancel a VR
session or end a call.
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System with INFINITI Voice Recognition. For additional command options,
refer to “List of voice commands” later in
this section.
Choosing a language
SAA1397
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
TALK/PHONE SEND
Push the “
” button to initiate a VR
session or answer an incoming call.
You can also use the “
” button to
skip through system feedback and to
enter commands during a call. See “List
of voice commands” and “During a call”
later in this section for more information.
You can interact with the Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System using English,
Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the “
more than 5 seconds.
” button for
2. The system announces: “Press the
“PHONE/SEND (
)” button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
“PHONE/END (
)” button to select a
different language.”
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-45
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
3. Press the “
Pairing procedure
” button.
phone, operate it to enter the code
“1234”.
For information on speaker adaptation,
see “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”
later in this section.
The code is always “1234” regardless
of the number of phones paired.
4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to
change the language to Spanish (in
Spanish) or French (in French). Use the
following chart to select the language.
NOTE:
Note: You must press the “
” button or
the “
” button within 5 seconds to
change the language.
Current
language
Press
(TALK/PHONE
SEND)
to select
Press
(MODE/PHONE
END)
to select
English
Spanish
French
Spanish
English
French
French
English
Spanish
5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After
5 seconds, the VR session will end, and
the language will not be changed.
1. Push the “
” button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available commands.
The pairing procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone manufacturer. See the cellular
phone Owner’s Manual for details. You
can
also
visit
www.infiniti.com/bluetooth for instructions on pairing INFINITI recommended cellular phones.
5. The system asks you to say a name for
E .
the phone j
A . The system acknowl2. Say: “Setup” j
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for
a name again.
B . The system ac3. Say: “Pair phone” j
knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.
Also, if more than one phone is paired
and the name sounds too much like a
name already used, the system tells
you, then prompts you for a name
again.
C . The system ac4. Say: “New phone” j
knowledges the command and asks
you to initiate pairing from the phone
D .
handset j
When you are asked to enter a PIN code
for pairing your Bluetooth cellular
6. The system asks you to assign a priority
F . The priority level determines
level j
which phone is active when more than
one paired Bluetooth phone is in the
vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup”
4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
later in this section for more information on changing priorities.
7. The system will ask if you would like to
G . Follow the
select a custom ring tone j
instructions provided by the system or
refer to “Setup” later in this section for
more information on selecting ringtones.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
4. When you have finished speaking the
phone number, the system repeats it
back and announces the available commands.
C . The system acknowl5. Say: “Dial” j
edges the command and makes the
call.
For additional command options, see “List
of voice commands” later in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
“
” button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
“
” button on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
1. Push the “
” button on steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
A . The system acknowl2. Say: “Call” j
edges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
B . For
3. Say the number you wish to call j
example, 555-1212 can be said as “five
five five one two one two.” See “How to
say numbers” earlier in this section for
more information.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
If you do not wish to take the call when
you hear the ring tone, press the “
”
button on the steering wheel to reject the
call.
For additional command options, see “List
of voice commands” later in this section.
When you push and release the “
”
button on the steering wheel, you can
choose from the commands on the Main
Menu. The following pages describe these
commands and the commands in each submenu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available anytime the system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at
anytime the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-47
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”
anytime the system is waiting for a response.
When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more
than one command at a time. For example,
say, “Call five five five one two one two” or
“Memo pad record.”
Also, when you get used to the system responses, you can skip ahead to the tone by
pressing the “
” button on the steering
wheel. However, if you press the “
”
button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session.
“Call”
See “Phone book” later in this section to
learn how to store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the phone book entry you wish to
call. The system acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple locations associated
with the name, the system asks you to
choose the location.
Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.
B
Number (speak digits) j
When prompted by the system, say the
number you wish to call. Refer to “How to
say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” earlier in this section for more details.
C
“Redial” j
Use the Redial command to call the last
number that was dialed within the vehicle.
NOTE:
A
Name (speak name) j
If you have stored entries in the Phone
Book, you can dial a number associated
with a name and location.
The system will not redial the last number
dialed by the handset keypad.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the
system announces, “There is no number to
redial” and ends the VR session.
D
“Call back” j
Use the Call Back command to dial the
number of the last incoming call within the
vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command,
repeats the number and begins dialing. If a
call back number does not exist, the
system announces, “There is no number to
call back” and ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command
options available. Press the “
” button
on the steering wheel to mute the receiving
voice and enter commands.
O “Help” — The system announces the
available commands.
O “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.
O “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers during a
call. For example, if you were directed
to dial an extension by an automated
system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated
with the numbers. The system then
ends the VR session and returns to the
call.
O “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System
to the cellular phone when privacy is
desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call.
Call transferred to privacy mode.” The
system then ends the VR session.
You can also issue the Transfer Call
command again to return to a handsfree call through the vehicle.
O “Mute” — Use the Mute command to
mute your voice so the other party
cannot hear it. Use the mute command
again to unmute your voice.
NOTE:
If the other party ends the call or the cellular phone network connection is lost while
the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature
may need to be reset to “off.”
“Phone book”
When prompted by the system, say the
name you would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a
name already stored, the system tells you,
then prompts you for a name again.
Once the system accepts the name and you
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a
location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).
For example, say: “Home.”
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for
each phone paired with the system. Each
name can have up to 4 locations/phone
numbers associated with it.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
A
“New entry” j
Use the New Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
The system acknowledges the location and
asks for a number.
For example, say: “five five five one two
one two.” See “How to say numbers”
earlier in this section for more information.
The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers,
choose “Store.”
The system confirms the name, location
and number. The system then asks if you
would like to store another location for the
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-49
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session.
B
“Edit” j
Use the Edit command to alter an existing
phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or
4th phone number to an existing entry.
When prompted by the system, say the
name of the entry you wish to edit.
The system acknowledges the name and
asks you for the location you would like to
edit.
Say the name of the location. The system
acknowledges and asks you for the phone
number you would like to store with this location.
See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.
The system repeats the number and
prompts you for the next command. When
you have finished entering numbers,
choose “Store.”
The system confirms the name, location
and number, then announces that the entry
has been stored. The system then ends the
VR session.
C
“Delete” j
Use the Delete command to erase one entry
from the phone book, all entries from the
phone book, the current redial number or
the current call back number.
To delete entries from the phone book, say
a name or “All entries” when prompted by
the system.
bers. When the playback of the list is complete the system ends the VR session.
You can stop the playback of the list at any
” button on the
time by pressing the “
steering wheel. The system ends the VR
session.
“Memo pad”
The system acknowledges the command
and asks you to confirm the deletion.
To delete the current redial number or call
back number, say “redial number” or “call
back number” when prompted by the
system.
If a redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without
asking for confirmation.
If there is no number for the entry you are
trying to delete, the system says so and
ends the VR session.
D
“List names” j
Use the List Names command to hear all
the names and locations in the phone
book.
The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3
voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long.
A
“Play” j
The system plays back all the memos in the
order of newest to oldest. The system ends
the VR session.
If there are no memos recorded, the
system announces “No messages to play.”
The system ends the VR session.
The system recites the phone book entries
but does not include the actual phone num-
4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
B
“Record” j
“Setup”
that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone.
The system announces “Recording” and a
tone sounds signaling you to begin.
If you try to pair a phone that has already
been paired to your vehicle’s system, the
system announces the name the phone is
already using. The pairing procedure will
then be cancelled.
Speak the information you wish to record
clearly. When you are done, press the
“
” or “
” button on the steering
wheel.
When prompted by the system, choose
from the following commands:
A tone sounds and the system announces
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to
end the VR session.
O “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a
phone” earlier in this section.
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if
you wish to record over the oldest memo.
C
“Delete” j
The Delete command erases all memos.
The system asks you to confirm this action
before deleting all memos.
Use the Setup command to change options
associated with the Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System.
A
“Pair phone” j
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a
phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System.
When you are asked to enter a PIN code for
pairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, operate it to enter the code “1234”.
The code is always “1234” regardless of
the number of phones paired.
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to
pair a sixth phone, the system announces
O “Replace phone” — The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would
like to replace.
Once you say the name of the phone
you wish to replace, the paring procedure will begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section.
O “List phone” — See the description
below.
B
“List phones” j
Use the List Phone command to hear the
names of the phones currently paired. If no
phones are paired, the system announces,
“No paired phones to list.” The system
then ends the VR session.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-51
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
C
“Select phone” j
Use the Select Phone command to select a
phone of lesser priority when two or more
phones paired with Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System are in the vehicle at the
same time.
The system asks you to name the phone
and confirm the selection.
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a
new phone.
D
“Change priority” j
Use the Change Priority command to
change the priority level of the active
phone.
For example, if the current priority levels
are:
Priority Level 1 = Phone A
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone C
and you change the priority level of Phone
C to Level 1, then:
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Priority Level 2 = Phone B
Priority Level 3 = Phone A
E
“Delete phone” j
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
specific phone or all phones from the
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
The priority level determines which phone
is active when more than one paired
Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle.
The system announces the names of the
phones already paired with the system and
their priority level. The system then gives
you the option to delete a specific phone,
all phones or listen to the list again.
The system states the priority level of the
active phone and asks for a new priority
level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
Once you chose to delete a phone or all
phones, the system asks you to confirm
this action.
If the new priority level is already being
used for another phone, the two phones
will swap priority levels.
NOTE:
When you delete a phone, the associated
phone book for that phone will also be deleted.
F
“Select ringtone” j
Use the Select Ringtone command to select
the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received.
The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the
following commands:
O “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select
that tone. If you say no, the system
plays the next ringtone available and
continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit.
O “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.
G
“Bluetooth off” j
Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off
the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.
When Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone
System is off, you will not be able to make
or receive calls using INFINITI Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to
the Phone Book.
You can still use the Memo Pad and access
Setup.
4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To turn on the system again, choose the
Bluetooth On command from the Setup
command.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park.
9. When training is finished, the system
will tell you an adequate number of
phrases have been recorded.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
3. Press and hold the “
more than 5 seconds.
” button for
10. The system will ask you to say your
name. Follow the instructions to register your name.
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
dialect users to train the system to improve
recognition accuracy. By repeating a
number of commands, the users can create
a voice model of their own voice that is
stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B.
If memory A is available, the system will
use memory A to store the model. If
memory A is in use and memory B is available, the system will use memory B to store
the model. If both of the memory locations
are in use, the system will ask the user to
select which memory location should be
overwritten.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably
quiet outdoor location.
4. The system announces: “Press the
“PHONE/SEND (
)” button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
“PHONE/END (
)” button to select a
different language.”
5. Press the “
” button.
For information on selecting a different
language, see “Choosing a language”
earlier in this section.
11. The system will announce that speaker
adaptation has been completed and the
system is ready.
The SA mode will stop if:
” button is pressed for more
O The “
than 5 seconds in SA mode.
O The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
O The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
or LOCK position.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory
locations are already in use, the system
will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow
the instructions provided by the
system.
Training phrases
7. When preparation is complete and you
are ready to begin, the press the
“
” button.
O Phrase 1
During the SA mode, the system instructs
the trainer to say the following phrases.
(The timing of input phrases is indicated by
the system.)
O Phrase 2
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow
the instructions provided by the
system.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-53
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry
from the phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)
CAUTION
O
The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
O
Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning the
Mobile Entertainment System components. Do not use solvents or cleaning
solutions.
WARNING
O
O
The Mobile Entertainment System (MES)
is designed for rear seat passenger viewing only.
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions [below
−4°F (−20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].
O
O
The driver must not attempt to operate
the MES while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do
not operate the system more than 15
minutes without starting the engine.
SAA0716
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-55
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SAA0717
DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
CONTROLS
8. “PLAY/PAUSE” button
The DVD player has the following controls:
10. “DISPLAY” button
1. “EJECT” button
11. NAVIGATION KEYS
9. “MENU” button
2. DVD slot
SAA0810
3. “ENTER” button
4. POWER on/off switch
REMOTE CONTROL
5. “MODE” button
The remote control has the following controls:
6. Input jacks
7. “STOP” button
1. “ONzOFF” button
4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
2. “STOP” button
3. “NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER” and “PREVIOUS TRACK/CHAPTER” button
4. “TITLE” button
5. “ENTER” button
6. “DISPLAY” button
7. “MODE” button
8. “SUBTITLE” button
9. “AUDIO” button
10. “ANGLE” button
SAA0719A
11. “CLEAR” button
1. Wireless remote controller receiver/
Wireless headphones transmitter
12. “PAUSE” button
13. “PLAY” button
14. “FAST
button
FORWARD/FAST
FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
REVERSE”
CAUTION
15. “MENU” button
16. NAVIGATION KEYS
17. “RETURN” button
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD
SAA0747
REMOTE CONTROL HOLDER
1 of the holder off, then put
Peel the sheet j
the remote control holder to the desired
position in the rear armrest.
O
The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-57
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin,wash
immediately with soap and water.
O
The screen rotates down to view and up
into the housing to store when not in
use. Ensure that the screen is latched securely into the housing when stored.
SAA0720
Headphones
SAA0721
PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC
(DVD)
Power ON/OFF:
Push the “POWER” button to turn the headphones on or off.
Volume control:
CAUTION
O
Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD for
extended periods of time with the engine
OFF can discharge the vehicle battery.
O
Do not allow the system to get wet. Excessive moisture such as spilled liquidsmay
cause the system to malfunction.
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the
volume.
The headphones will automatically be
turned off in 30 seconds if there is no
sound during that period. To prevent the
battery from being discharged, keep the
power supply turned off when not in use.
4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
The driver must not attempt to wear the
headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
O
While playing video CD media, this DVD
player does not guarantee complete
functionality of all video CD formats.
With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos, video CDs and CDs using headphones.
Passengers in the rear seat can enjoy the
sound independently of the front seat.
Using the “CDzDVD” button located on the
front seat, you can also hear the sound of
the DVD player through the speakers in the
vehicle.
It is possible to operate the DVD player by
remote control.
Headphones are a wireless type and no
cables are necessary. You can use them in
almost all the ranges in the rear seat. (It is
not possible to use the headphones in the
front seat.)
“POWER” on/off button:
or
PLAY:
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC
or ON position, push the “POWER” button
to turn the DVD player on or off.
When the “PLAY/PAUSE” button on the
player or the “PLAY” button on the remote
control is pushed, the player will play.
Insert the compact disc into the slot with
the label side facing up. The digital video
disc will be guided automatically into the
slot.
In play mode, the display will show
on the upper left corner of the display.
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind) (Remote
control only):
CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the slot.
This could damage the player.
MODE select switch:
Push the Mode button to select
Audio/Video source between DVD and AUX
input (input jacks on the faceplate, Red =
right channel audio input, White = left
channel audio input, and Yellow = Video
input).
The display will show the “AUX” in the
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the Mode is changed to AUX.
To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary
input jacks” in this section.
Push “FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE” buttons to carry out the fast forward or fast reverse presentation at 5 times normal play
speed.
Push “FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE” buttons again or “PLAY” button to resume the
normal play speed.
NEXT CHAPTER/
PREVIOUS CHAPTER:
When the “
” (NEXT CHAPTER) button
is pushed while the digital video disc is being played, the program next to the present
one will start to play from its beginning.
Push several times to skip through programs. The digital video disc will advance
the number of times the button is pushed.
” (PREVIOUS CHAPTER)
When the “
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-59
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
button is pushed, the program being
played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through programs.
The digital video disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.
or
PAUSE:
When the “PLAY/PAUSE” button on the
player or the “PAUSE” button on the remote control is pushed, the player will
pause playing of the media. In pause
mode, the player will show
on the upper left corner of the display until the
player is changed to another mode.
STOP:
Push the “STOP” button once to stop
playing the media. The display will show
in the upper left corner of the display
for 4 seconds, and the last disc position
will be stored. When the “PLAY” button is
pushed again, it will resume at the stored
disc track and time position.
If the “STOP” button is pushed again when
the player is already in Stop mode, it will
reinitialize the pointer to the beginning of
the disc. In effect it will ignore the last
stored disc position and upon receipt of
the next play message it will begin at the
Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the
disc”.
EJECT:
When the “EJECT” button is pushed with
the digital video disc loaded, it will be
ejected.
The display will show the EJECT symbol
in the upper left corner of the display
for 4 seconds once the “EJECT” button is
pushed.
If the digital video disc is not loaded, the
display will show “NO DISC”.
If the digital video disc comes out and is
not removed within 25 seconds, it will be
pulled back into the slot to protect it.
DISPLAY:
If the DISPLAY control is pushed for less
than 2 seconds, the display menu will appear on the screen.
O The display menu will remain on the
screen for 10 seconds if no subsequent
control activations occur.
O Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate
within the display menu, and use ENTER
to select the item.
O Holding the DISPLAY control on the
faceplate for longer than approximately
2 seconds while in the display menu
will reset the display characteristics to
their nominal values. (Faceplate feature
only)
If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is pushed for more than 2 seconds,
the media track/time information will be
displayed along the bottom of the display.
Pushing the DISPLAY control for more than
2 seconds will remove the media
track/time information from the display.
(Faceplate feature only)
NAVIGATION KEYS:
If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the
NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and
Right) will perform the following functions:
next
chapter/track,
previous
chapter/track, fast reverse and fast forward, and the display will show
,
and
,
respectively in the
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds. (Faceplate feature only)
If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of
the NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, down and
Right) will perform the following functions:
next chapter/track, previous chapter/track
and slow forward, and the display will
4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
show
,
and
respectively in
the upper left corner of the display for 4
seconds. (Faceplate feature only)
If media is in activated MENU mode, the
NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate
Up, Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
Down, Left, and Right within the menu.
“ENTER”:
In MENU mode, push the “ENTER” button
to select MENU items.
In the display menu, push the “ENTER”
button to select items for modification, as
per the on-screen instructions.
“MENU”:
If the media is in PLAY mode and the
“MENU” button is pressed, the DVD menu
will appear on the screen. Use Navigation
Keys to navigate within the menu, and use
ENTER to select the item.
Push the “MENU” button again to return to
PLAY mode.
TITLE (Remote control only):
Push “TITLE” button to return the DVD
media to the “title” of the DVD.
Push “TITLE” button again to return to the
previous stop point and play.
NUMERIC KEYPAD (0-9 & ≥10) (Remote
control only):
RETURN (Remote control only):
Push the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their numeric value.
Push RETURN function to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu.
SUBTITLES (Remote control only):
Push the “SUBTITLES” button to call-up
subtitle selection menu.
Repeatedly press the “SUBTITLE” button to
cycle through each available subtitle.
AUDIO (Remote control only):
Push the “AUDIO” button to call-up audio
menu.
Repeatedly press the “AUDIO” button to
cycle through each available audio track.
The “≥10” button input numbers greater
than or equal to 10, allowing up three
digits to be input for selecting
chapter/title/track number.
The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will continuously shift the previously
input number to the “left”.
The chapter/title/track number will be automatically selected (if valid, based on media content) if 3 seconds expire without
any keypad inputs.
Push the “ANGLE” button to call-up camera
angle menu.
The operator can cancel the input
chapter/title/track number by actuating
the CLEAR control prior to the expiration of
the 3-second timer.
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle
through each available angle.
These functions can be used only for the
DVD discs which correspond to them.
CLEAR (Remote control only):
Auxiliary input jacks
Push the “CLEAR” button to clear all numeric inputs, if actuated prior to expiration
of the 3-second timer.
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the
control panel. Compatible devices such as
video games camcorders and portable
ANGLE (Remote control only):
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-61
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes.
O Yellow - video input
O White - left channel audio input
O
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme temperature conditions [below
−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)].
O
Do not attempt to operate the system in
extreme humidity conditions (less than
10% or more than 75%).
O Red - right channel audio input
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to
clean the surfaces of your Mobile Entertainment System. (DVD player face, screen, remote control, etc.)
CAUTION
SAA0451
HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD
CAUTION
Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system.
O
O
Do not use excessive force on the
monitor screen.
Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc.
O
O
Avoid touching or scratching the monitor
screen as it may become dirty or
damaged.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean,
soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a
circular motion.
O
4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Do not use a conventional recordcleaner,
benzine, thinner or alcohol intended for
industrial use.
O
A new disc may be rough on its inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges
using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
O
Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
SAA0722
O Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contamination or flaws. Otherwise, signals
may not be read properly.
Remote control and headphones
battery replacement
O Do not write, draw or attach anything
on any side of the DVD.
Replace the battery as follows:
O Do not store the DVD in locations with
direct sunlight or in high temperatures
or humidity.
2. Replace both batteries with new ones.
O Always place discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
O Size AAA (headphones)
O Do not put on any sticker or write anything on either surface of the DVD.
Make sure that the ! and @ ends on the
batteries match the markings inside the
compartment.
3. Close the lid securely.
1. Open the lid.
O Size AA (remote control)
SAA0723
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 3
above.
O If you will not be using the remote control for long periods of time, remove
the batteries.
O Replacement of the batteries is needed
when the remote control only functions
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-63
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
1 for the
INFINITI recommends position j
best radio reception
at extremely close distances to the
MES or not at all.
O Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
Removing the antenna
O An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove
by turning counterclockwise.
You can remove the antenna if necessary.
O When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the remote control
and headphones.
CAUTION
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
O
Be sure that antenna is removed before
the vehicle enters an automatic car
wash.
O
Be sure to fold down the antenna before
the vehicle enters a garage with a low
ceiling.
SAA0748
ANTENNA
Placing the antenna
You can adjust the antenna to three different positions manually.
4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your INFINITI, be sure to observe
the following cautions, otherwise the new
equipment may adversely affect the engine
control system and other electronic parts.
O
O
O
CAUTION
O
Keep the antenna as far as possible away
from the electronic control modules.
WARNING
O
A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.
Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20
cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna
wire next to any harness.
O
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
O
Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
O
For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.
If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular
phone operational mode (if so equipped)
is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop your vehicle
before doing so.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-65
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ............... 5-2
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................... 5-2
Three-way catalyst....................................... 5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions (for AWD models) ..................... 5-3
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(for models without run-flat tire only) ........... 5-3
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(for models with run-flat tire only) ................ 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover ..................... 5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .............. 5-7
Driving safety precautions ........................... 5-8
Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key
system) .......................................................... 5-10
Key positions ............................................ 5-11
INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system.......... 5-11
Ignition switch (models with the Intelligent
Key system) .................................................... 5-12
Ignition switch positions ........................... 5-12
INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system.......... 5-13
Before starting the engine ............................... 5-13
Starting the engine ......................................... 5-14
Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-14
Automatic transmission ............................. 5-14
Parking brake .................................................
Lane departure warning (LDW) system
(if so equipped) ..............................................
Precautions on lane departure warning
(LDW) system ............................................
Lane departure warning (LDW) system
operation ..................................................
Cruise control .................................................
Precautions on cruise control .....................
Cruise control operations...........................
Intelligent cruise control system
(if so equipped) ..............................................
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode .............................................
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ...
Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode ............................................
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode
operation ..................................................
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode ........................................................
Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise
Control system equipped models) ..............
Break-in schedule ...........................................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-28
5-41
5-45
5-45
Increasing fuel economy .................................
All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped) .............
Parking/parking on hills..................................
Power steering................................................
Brake system..................................................
Braking precautions ..................................
Brake assist....................................................
Brake assist .............................................
Brake assist (with preview function)
(Intelligent Cruise Control system
equipped model) .......................................
5-45
5-46
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-50
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....................
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system .............
Cold weather driving .......................................
Freeing a frozen door lock ..........................
Anti-freeze ................................................
Battery ......................................................
Draining of coolant water ...........................
Tire equipment ..........................................
Special winter equipment ..........................
Driving on snow or ice................................
Engine block heater (if so equipped)...........
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
5-52
5-54
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-57
5-57
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
O
O
Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets should
also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others
through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Properly secure all cargo to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a
sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
O
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
O
Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
O
Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
O
Keep the lift gate closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn
into the passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the lift gate open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation switch OFF and
the fan control at maximum position to
circulate the air.
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
the seal on the lift gate or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle.
tain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can
cause unconsciousness or death.
O
If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
O
If a special body, camper or other equipment is added for recreational or other
usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as
stoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. may
also generate carbon monoxide.)
O
The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
5-2 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the converter are burned
at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
O
WARNING
O
O
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals or
flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
O
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
O
CAUTION
O
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
O
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions
in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel
flow into the three-way catalyst, causing
it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the
engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of
performance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the vehicle
inspected promptly by an INFINITI
dealer.
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
ON-PAVEMENT AND
OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
(for AWD models)
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement and
off-road applications. This gives them a
higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.
An advantage of higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. However, they are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles
any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers particularly at high speeds. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (for models
without run-flat tire only)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
Starting and driving 5-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information
O The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
O The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16
MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-
sure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
O Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Low outside temperature can lower the
temperature of the air inside the tire
which can cause a lower tire inflation
pressure. This may cause the low tire
pressure warning light to illuminate. If
the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
O You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen
does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. See “Tire pressure information” in the “4. Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio system” section.
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section and “Tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.
5-4 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (for models with
run-flat tire only)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
If the vehicle is being driven with one or
more flat tires, the warning light will flash
continuously and a chime will sound for 10
seconds. The chime will only sound at the
first indication of a flat tire and the warning
light will flash continuously. When the Flat
tire warning is activated, have the system
reset and the tire checked and replaced if
necessary by an INFINITI dealer. Even if
the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire
pressure, the warning light will continue to
flash until the system is reset by an INFINITI dealer.
Your vehicle can be driven for a limited
time on a flat tire. See “Run-flat tires (if so
equipped)” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
O The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
O The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16
MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
Starting and driving 5-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Low outside temperature can lower the
temperature of the air inside the tire
which can cause a lower tire inflation
pressure. This may cause the low tire
pressure warning light to illuminate. If
the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
O
O You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen
does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. See “Tire pressure information” in the “4. Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section.
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure monitoring system” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section.
long distance at high speeds may
damage the tires.
WARNING
O
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In
case of emergency” section for changing
a flat tire.)
Although you can continue driving with a
punctured run-flat tire (if so equipped),
remember that vehicle handling stability
is reduced, which could lead to an accident andpersonal injury. Also, driving a
O
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88
km/h) and do not drive more than 50
miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat
tire (if so equipped). The actual distance
the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle
load, road conditions and other factors.
O
Do not tow a trailer when a run-flat tire (if
so equipped) is flat.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
O
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
5-6 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals from
the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner may result in loss of control
or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or
sudden steering maneuvers, because
these driving practices could cause you to
lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or
cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times,
and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or
drugs (including prescription or over-thecounter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt. See
“Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section and also instruct your passengers
to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted or improperly belted
person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly
wearing a seat belt.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or
drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces
coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgment. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and
others. Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the severity of
the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You
must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what
is considered to be legally intoxicated, the
fact is that alcohol affects all people differ-
Starting and driving 5-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
ently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
And that’s true for drugs too (over the
counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).
Don’t drive if your ability to operate your
vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or
some other physical condition.
O
O
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
O
O
Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle should
be seated with their seat belt fastened.
This will keep you and your passengers
in position when driving over rough terrain.
Before driving up or down grades, check
the road surface for bumps or potholes.
Be sure to climb a gentle slope and descend a gentle slope.
Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tip over sideways much more easily than
they can forward or backward.
Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you may stall. If
you drive down them, you may not be
able to control your speed. If you drive
across them, you may roll over.
O
Do not move the selector lever while
driving on downhill grades as this could
cause loss of control of the vehicle.
O
Be sure to use the engine brake. The foot
brake performance may be reduced, resulting in a possible accident.
O
Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an accident.
O
If your engine stalls or you cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt
to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or
roll over. Always back straight down in R
(Reverse) range. Never back down in
N(Neutral), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.
O
Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
range to control your speed.
O
Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly
secure all cargo so it will not be thrown
forward and cause injury to you or your
passengers.
O
To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack and evenly distribute
the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this manual. This
could cause your vehicle to roll over.
O
Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly
and injure your hands. Instead drive
5-8 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Before operating the vehicle, ensure that
the driver and all passengers have their
seat belts fastened.
O
Always drive with the floor mats in place
as the floor may become hot.
O
Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.
O
Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
O
If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
Your INFINITI all-wheel drive vehicle
has a higher center of gravity than a twowheel drive vehicle. The vehicle is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional two-wheel drive
ning. The AWD warning light blinks and
the driving mode changes to 2WD. This
could reduce traction force remarkably.
Be especially careful when towing a
trailer. (AWD models)
vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle
correctly could result in loss of control
and/or a rollover accident.
with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
O
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
O
Be sure to check the brakes immediately
after driving in mud or water. See “Brake
system” later in this section.
O
Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills.
If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls
forward, backward or sideways, you
could be injured.
O
Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel
hub, more frequent maintenance may be
required. See the maintenance schedule
in the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.
O
Do not drive continuously on sandy or
muddy roads with the rear wheels spin-
O
A vehicle equipped with AWD (All-Wheel
Drive) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment.
Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment
may result in transmission damage or
unexpected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
O
Never operate the accelerator pedal with
any wheels raised and the other wheels
on the ground while jacking up or with
any wheels on a roller and the other
wheels on the ground. Otherwise, the vehicle could lurch forward or backward.
(AWD models)
Starting and driving 5-9
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
IGNITION SWITCH (except Intelligent Key
system)
O
O
1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
When a wheel is off the ground due to an
unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel
excessively. (AWD models)
2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON
direction.
When the vehicle is on a free roller or the
front or rear wheels are jacked up, do not
start the engine. The vehicle could lurch
forward. (AWD models)
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch, the selector lever cannot be moved
from P (Park) position. The selector lever
can be moved if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the foot brake pedal is
depressed.
SSD0392
The ignition lock is designed so that the
key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed
until the selector lever is moved to the P
(Park) position.
When removing the key from the ignition,
make sure the selector lever is in the P
(Park) position.
If the selector lever is not returned to P
(Park) position, the key cannot be moved
toward LOCK.
When the key cannot be turned toward the
LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key:
1 in between
There is an OFF position j
LOCK and ACC, although it does not show
on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in
OFF the steering wheel is not locked.
In order for the steering wheel to be
locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a
turn clockwise from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and
turn it gently while rotating the steering
wheel slightly right and left.
5-10 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will
lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
KEY POSITIONS
The switch includes an anti-theft steering
lock device.
LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)
The ignition key can only be removed when
the switch is in this position.
OFF (1)
The engine can be turned off without
locking the steering wheel.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed
until the selector lever is moved to the P
(Park) position.
ACC (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries such as the radio when the engine is
not running.
ON (Normal operating position) (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START (4)
This position activates the starter motor,
starting the engine.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
key.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
INFINITI recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference
is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
Starting and driving 5-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
IGNITION SWITCH (models with the
Intelligent Key system)
1. Move the selector lever into the P position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
The selector lever can be moved from P position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.
SPA1628
C in between
There is an OFF position j
LOCK and ACC, although it does not show
on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is in
OFF the steering wheel is not locked.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK
position and removed until the selector
lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
In order for the steering wheel to be
locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a
turn counterclockwise from the straight up
position.
When turning the ignition switch, make
sure the selector lever is in the P position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To unlock
the steering wheel, push the ignition
switch in and turn it gently while rotating
the steering wheel slightly right and left.
If the selector lever is not returned to the P
position, the ignition switch cannot be
moved toward the LOCK position.
When the ignition switch cannot be turned
toward the LOCK position while keeping
the Intelligent Key, proceed as follows:
If the battery of the vehicle equipped with
the Intelligent Key system is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be turned from
the LOCK position, even using the mechanical key or valet key.
WARNING
Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
B range
Push in the ignition switch to the j
when you turn it.
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in
A position.
the j
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed in, and turned to the ACC posiD while carrying the Intelligent Key.
tion j
D :
ACC (Accessories) j
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
5-12 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
E :
ON (Normal operating position) j
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
F :
START j
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the knob
immediately. It will automatically return to
the ON position.
The ignition switch cannot be turned back
to the LOCK position unless the shift lever
is in P position. (It can be turned to only
C .)
j
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period.
This can discharge the battery.
tered key (for example, when interference
is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
key.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
INFINITI recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
O Make sure the area around the vehicle
is clear.
O Maintenance items should be checked
periodically, for example, each time
you check engine oil.
O Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
O Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also, check tires
for proper inflation.
O Lock all doors.
O Position seat and adjust head restraints.
O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
O Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
O Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (3) position.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a regis-
Starting and driving 5-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). (P preferred.)
The starter is designed not to operate if
the selector lever is in one of the driving
positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key
when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
O If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal
a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor)
and hold it then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
O If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the
engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the key when
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
the engine starts. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15
seconds at a time. If the engine does not
start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
5-speed automatic transmission
The automatic transmission in your vehicle
is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this
transmission. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driving
enjoyment.
Starting the vehicle
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal and push the selector
lever button before shifting the selector
lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D
(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be
sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever.
This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must
be depressed before shifting from P (Park)
to any drive position while the ignition
switch is ON.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) position and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned
5-14 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
key is removed from the switch.
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and push the selector lever button to
shift into a driving gear.
2. Release the parking brake and foot
brake, then gradually start the vehicle
in motion.
WARNING
O
O
O
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral)
to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift
mode. Always depress the brake pedal
until shifting is completed. Failure to do
so could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
On slippery roads, do not downshift. This
may cause a loss of control.
O
Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving forward.
Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while
the vehicle is moving rearward. These
could cause an accident.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing
the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should
be used for this purpose.
SSD0539
To move the selector lever,
: Push the button while depressing
the brake pedal,
: Push the button,
: Just move the selector lever.
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and shift the selector lever
from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D
(Drive), or Manual shift mode position.
Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R
(Reverse). All other positions can be selected without pushing the button.
Starting and driving 5-15
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector lever
is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and result
in serious personal injury or property
damage.
If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any
reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N
(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key
cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed
from the ignition switch. Move the selector
lever to P (Park) position, then the key can
be turned to LOCK.
P (Park):
Use this selector position when the vehicle
is parked or when starting the engine. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake first, then move the lever to the P
(Park) position.
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift range
can be selected manually.
CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Always be
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the
meter.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1
M
M5
→
←
M
2
→
←
3
M
→
←
M
4
→
←
5
M
(5th):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
M4
(4th):
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking would be advantageous.
M3
(3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
D (Drive):
M1
(1st):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
Manual shift mode
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep
snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine
braking on steep downhill grades.
When the selector lever is shifted from D to
the manual shift gate with the vehicle
O Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
5-16 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
than M4 range. This reduces fuel
economy.
O When shifting up, move the selector
lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher
range.)
O When shifting down, move the selector
lever to the − (down) side. (Shifts to
lower range.)
O Moving the selector lever to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession. However, if this motion is rapidly done, the second shifting may not
be completed properly.
O In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to
1st gear before the vehicle comes to a
stop. When accelerating again, it is
necessary to shift up to the desired
range.
O When canceling the manual shift mode,
return the selector lever to the D position. The transmission returns to the
normal driving mode.
O In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
Accelerator downshift
— In D position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress
the accelerator pedal to the floor. This
shifts the transmission down into the lower
gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When fail-safe operation occurs, the automatic transmission will be locked in 4th
gear.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position and wait for 3
seconds. Then turn the switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to
its normal operating condition. If it does
not return to its normal operating condition, have an INFINITI dealer check the
transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0540
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the selector lever may not be moved from
the P (Park) position even with the brake
pedal depressed.
To move the selector lever, apply the
parking brake, depress the brake pedal,
and push the shift lock release button. The
selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral).
This allows the vehicle to be moved if the
battery is discharged.
Starting and driving 5-17
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
PARKING BRAKE
If the lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have an INFINITI dealer check the
automatic transmission system as soon as
possible.
WARNING
SPA2126
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal.
O
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
O
Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
O
Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
O
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal and
the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.
5-18 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
PRECAUTIONS ON LANE
DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM
WARNING
SSD0409
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
warns the driver when the vehicle is traveling
close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers. It
operates at approximately 45 MPH (72 km/h)
and above. The system monitors lane
markers of the traveling lane using the
1 located inside the map light
camera unit j
cover.
When the camera unit detects that the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or
the right of the traveling lane, the LDW indi2 on the instrument panel flashes
cator j
and a chime sounds to alert the driver.
O
This system is only a warning device to
inform the driver of an unintended lane
departure. It will not steer the vehicle or
prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
keep the vehicle in the traveling lane,
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
O
The system will not operate at speeds
below approximately 45 MPH (72 km/h)
or if it cannot detect lane markers.
O
If the lane departure warning system
malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator light in the instrument panel will then illuminate
(orange).
SSD0410
The LDW system can be turned on or off by
3 . When the
pushing the LDW switch j
system is on, the LDW system ON indicator
4 illuminates.
j
Starting and driving 5-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
O
If the LDW indicator light illuminates (orange), park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn the engine off and re-start the engine. If the LDW indicator light continues
to illuminate, have the system checked
by an INFINITI dealer.
Excessive noise will interfere with
warning system chime sound and the
chime may not be heard.
O The system may not function properly
under the following conditions:
- On roads where the lane markers are
faded or are not painted clearly.
- On roads where the lane markers are
painted yellow.
- On roads where water, dirt or snow is
covering the lane markers.
O The system may not monitor the lane
markers in certain road, weather or
driving conditions.
- On roads where there are sharp
curves.
- On roads where the discontinued
lane markers are present, such as
near tollgates.
- On roads where there are no general
lane markers.
- On roads where the lane width is too
narrow.
- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.).
- When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle in the camera.
SIC2554
- When entering or exiting a tunnel
where a sudden change in brightness
occurs.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM OPERATION
- When traveling close to the vehicle in
front of you, which obstructs the
camera detection range.
The LDW system has an automatic mode
and manual mode.
- When the vehicle’s traveling direction
does not align with the lane marker.
- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
windshield in front of the LDW
camera.
In the automatic mode, the LDW system
automatically turns on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. The
2 located on the
LDW system ON indicator j
1 illuminates, indicating that
LDW switch j
the system is on.
- Where the traveling lane merges or
separates.
5-20 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
To cancel the LDW system, push the LDW
1 to turn off the LDW system ON inswitch j
2 . To turn on the system, push the
dicator j
1 again.
LDW switch j
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 45 MPH (72 km/h), the LDW
system enters standby mode. When the vehicle speed increases to more than 45 MPH
(72 km/h) again, the LDW system activates.
In the manual mode, the LDW system will
be off when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position. The LDW switch must be
pushed to turn on the system.
To change modes, push and hold the LDW
1 for more than 4 seconds when
switch j
2 is off. A
the LDW system ON indicator j
chime will sound and blinking of the LDW
system indicator indicates that the mode
change has been completed.
Temporary disabled status at high
temperature
SSD0411
When the vehicle approaches either the left
or the right of the traveling lane while
driving over approximately 45 MPH (72
3 on the instrukm/h), the LDW indicator j
ment panel flashes and a chime sounds to
alert the driver.
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then
started, the lane departure warning system
may cancel automatically. The LDW switch
ON indicator will blink.
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the system will again operate automatically and the LDW switch ON indicator illuminates.
When you use the lane change signal and
change your traveling lane, the LDW
system will enter the standby mode until
the lane change is completed. Once the vehicle completes the lane change and the
camera detects lane markers, the LDW system starts again to monitor lane markers.
Starting and driving 5-21
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
CRUISE CONTROL
O Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch
the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. Doing so
could cause failure or malfunction. If
the camera unit is damaged due to an
accident, contact an INFINITI dealer.
O Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit. This could cause
failure or malfunction.
SSD0412
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
camera unit maintenance
1 for the LDW
The LDW camera unit j
system is located inside the map light
cover.
To keep the LDW system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
O Always keep the windshield clean. The
sensing capability of the camera unit
depends on the condition of the windshield. See “Cleaning interior” in the
“7. Appearance and care” section for
cleaning instruction.
O Do not place reflective materials, such
as a white paper or mirrors on the instrument panel. Reflection of the sunlight may adversely affect the camera
unit’s lane marker detection capability.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
O
O
O
O
O
it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a
set speed.
in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
on winding or hilly roads.
on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
in very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control
and result in an accident.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
O If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET
indicator light on the meter panel then
blinks to warn the driver.
O If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled automatically.
5-22 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To set at cruising speed, accelerate your
vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The SET
indicator light will come on.) Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will
maintain the set speed.
O If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have
the system checked by an INFINITI
dealer.
O The SET indicator light may blink when
the cruise control main switch is turned
on
while
pushing
the
RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the
cruise control system, perform the preceding steps in the order indicated.
O To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.
SSD0528
O The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, follow either of
these three methods:
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
2. SET/COAST switch
a) Push the cancel switch. The SET indicator light will go out.
3. CANCEL switch
4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
main switch on. The CRUISE indicator light
on the meter panel will come on.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
light will go out.
c) Turn the main switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator
lights will go out.
O If you depress the brake pedal while
pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE set
switch and reset at the cruising speed,
turn the main switch off once and then
turn it on again.
Starting and driving 5-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
O The cruise control will automatically be
cancelled if the vehicle slows down
below approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).
b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
O Move the selector lever to N (Neutral)
position. The SET indicator light will go
out.
c) Push, then quickly release the SET/
COAST switch. Each time you do this,
the set speed will decrease by about 1
MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
b) Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25
MPH (40 km/h).
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of
you according to that vehicle’s speed (up to
the set speed), or at the set speed when
the road ahead is clear.
The ICC function can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
O Vehicle-to-vehicle
mode:
a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET/COAST switch and release it.
control
For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you up to the preset speed.
O Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode:
For cruising at a preset speed.
c) Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
distance
WARNING
O
Always drive carefully and attentively
when using either cruise control mode.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
cruise control. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s
5-24 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
speed in emergency situations. Do not
use cruise control except in appropriate
road and traffic conditions.
O
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning buzzer will not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention
to the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you or a collision
could occur.
SSD0541
1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
A to choose the
Push the MAIN switch j
1
cruise control mode between j
the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
2 the conventional (fixed speed)
and j
cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, see the following description. For
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see page 5-40.
SELECTING THE
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
1 , quickly push and release
control mode j
A .
the MAIN switch j
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot
be changed to the other cruise control
mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN
switch once to turn the system off. Then
push the MAIN switch again to turn the
Starting and driving 5-25
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
system back on and select the desired
cruise control mode.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25%
of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system automatically maintains a selected
distance from the vehicle traveling in front
of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up
to the set speed), or at the set speed when
the road ahead is clear.
With ICC, the driver can maintain the same
speed as other vehicles without the constant need to adjust the set speed as you
would with a normal cruise control system.
WARNING
O
This system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
O
The system is primarily intended for use
on straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic. It is not advisable to use the
system in city traffic or congested areas.
O
This system will not adapt automatically
to road conditions. This system should
be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not
use the system on roads with sharp
curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in
fog.
SSD0315A
PRECAUTIONS ON
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
A detects a slower
If the distance sensor j
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front at the selected
distance.
5-26 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
The distance sensor will not detect under
most conditions:
O
O Stationary and slow moving vehicles
O Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
O Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
O Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane
This system will not automatically brake
the vehicle to a stop.
WARNING
O
As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the Intelligent Cruise Control system.
This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or
overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance to the
vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles.
O
Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, the system does
not automatically stop the vehicle. If the
vehicle speed falls below approximately
20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent Cruise
Control system is automatically canceled
and a warning chime sounds. (The brake
control is also canceled.)
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
system sensor
— On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes)
The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the Intelligent Cruise Control system under the following conditions:
— On repeated uphill and downhill roads
— When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between
vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
— On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
— On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
— During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
• When the windshield wiper is operated at the low speed (LO) or high
speed (HI) position, the Intelligent
Cruise Control system is automatically canceled.
O
Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control
system if you are towing a trailer. The
system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
O
In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles
Starting and driving 5-27
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
ahead. The sensor generally detects the
signals returned from the reflectors on a
vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on the vehicle
ahead, the ICC system may not maintain
the selected distance.
using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
alert and avoid using the ICC system
when it is not recommended in this section.
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot detect the signals:
O When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
is positioned high on the vehicle
(trailer, etc.)
SSD0315A
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
MODE OPERATION
Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of
the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
may not be able to maintain the selected
distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under
some circumstances.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
A located on the front
mode uses a sensor j
of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling
O When the reflector on the vehicle ahead
is missing, damaged or covered
O When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
is covered with dirt, snow and road
spray
O When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility
O When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces
the sensor’s visibility
O When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of
your vehicle
5-28 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O When your vehicle is towing a trailer,
etc.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation. When
the sensor is covered with dirt or obstructions, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a
transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc.,
the ICC system may not detect them. In
these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected
following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance and reduce the speed to match
the slower vehicle ahead; the system will
decelerate the vehicle as necessary. However, the ICC system can only apply up to
25% of the vehicles total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system
cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will
sound a warning chime and blink the
system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
O When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The system will cancel and a warning
chime will sound if the speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). The
system will also disengage below the 20
MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or over the
maximum set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or
traffic congestion.
Refer to “Approach warning” later in this
section.
The following items are controlled in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
O When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode maintains the speed set
by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 25 and 90 MPH
(40 and 144 km/h).
O When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode adjusts the speed to maintain the
distance, selected by driver, from the
vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed
range is between approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) and up to the set speed.
Starting and driving 5-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSD0252
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
and sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may
warn you by blinking the system indicator
5-30 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SSD0253
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction, the
ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a
vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the
ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the
vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane,
etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs,
the ICC system may warn you by blinking
the system indicator and sounding the
chime unexpectedly. You will have to
manually control the proper distance away
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC will adjust the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the
freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and
maintain the speed up to the set speed.
Pay attention to the driving operation to
maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs,
you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
5. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
O Long
O Middle
O Short
SSD0542
Intelligent cruise control switch
The system is operated by a MAIN switch
and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
2. SET/COAST switch:
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
SSD0543
Intelligent cruise control system
display
The display is located under the tachometer.
1. Intelligent Cruise Control
warning light (Orange)
system
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
5-32 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
3. MAIN switch indicator light (Green)
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
5. Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance between
vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.
6. Indicates your vehicle
SSD0544
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the
1 comes on as illustrated to check
display j
for a burned-out bulb, and it turns off when
the engine is started.
SSD0545
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
A on. The
and release the MAIN switch j
cruise indicator light, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come
on and in a standby state for setting.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch is
Starting and driving 5-33
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O While the brakes are applied by the
driver
off when not using the Intelligent Cruise
Control.
O When
pushing
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch without a set speed
in memory
O When the windshield wipers are operating at low speed (LO) or high speed
(HI)
O When the parking brake is applied
O When the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is switched off
SSD0546
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicle
ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator
come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.
The Intelligent Cruise Control system
cannot be set under the following conditions even if the SET/COAST switch is
pushed.
O When traveling outside the 25 to 90
MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range
5-34 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
The ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed
of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver
selected distance.
SSD0327A
1. System set display with vehicle ahead
2. System set display without vehicle
ahead
System operation
WARNING
Normally when controlling the distance to a
vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accel-
erate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due
to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in.
Always stay alert when using the ICC
system.
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed,
similar to standard cruise control, as long
as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.
The stoplights of the vehicle come on and
the brake pedal depresses when braking is
performed by the ICC system.
CAUTION
Never place your foot under the brake pedal
when the brake is operated by the Intelligent
Cruise Control system. You may get your foot
caught in the pedal.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Starting and driving 5-35
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
How to change the set vehicle
speed
Vehicle ahead not detected:
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of
these methods:
O Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
When a vehicle is no longer detected the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
O Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
O Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
ON/OFF switch indicator and set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
SSD0328
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator will flash when the vehicle
speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle
detect indicator will turn off when the area
ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in
the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
O Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
O Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. The set vehicle
speed will increase by approximately 5
MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
O Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH (1
km/h for Canada).
5-36 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for
Canada).
O Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for
Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25
MPH (40 km/h).
SSD0547
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.
A
Each time the DISTANCE switch j
is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again
in that sequence.
Starting and driving 5-37
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
system warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe
vehicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection and set
distance indicator blink.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
O When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing
O When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing
O When the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system
SSD0329
O The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the
longer the distance.
Approach warning
O If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long”. (Each time the
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-
engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)
O When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
The warning chime will not sound when
your vehicle approaches vehicles that are
parked or moving slowly.
5-38 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.
O When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)
SSD0284A
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
A
the ICC sensor detects some reflectors j
which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes
or on the side of the road. This may cause
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect
these reflectors when the vehicle is driven
on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor
may also detect reflectors on narrow roads
or in road construction zones. In these
cases you will have to manually control the
proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
O When the selector lever is shifted to the
N (Neutral) position
O When the windshield wipers are operated at low speed (LO) or high speed
(HI)
O When the parking brake is applied
O When the VDC is turned off
O When the VDC operates
SSD0330
Warning light and display
Condition A
The chime sounds and the Intelligent
Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described
below. Part of the system display will come
on or blink, making it impossible to set.
O When the VDC is turned off
O When the VDC operates
O When a tire slips
Starting and driving 5-39
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the Intelligent Cruise Control MAIN Switch.
Turn the ICC system back on to use the
system.
SSD0548
SSD0549
Condition B
Condition C
When the sensor window is dirty, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
ICC system is automatically canceled.
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, the chime sounds and the system
warning light (Orange) will come on.
The chime sounds and the system warning
light (Orange) will come on and the set distance indicators will blink.
Action to take:
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off.
Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth
and then perform the settings again.
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set
the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or the
indicator stays on, it may indicate that the
system is malfunctioning. Although the ve-
5-40 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
hicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
to an accident, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause a failure or malfunction.
CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
SSD0315A
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING
Sensor maintenance
A is located
The sensor for the ICC system j
below the front bumper.
O
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
O
Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
of you or a collision could occur.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
O Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe
with a soft cloth carefully so as not to
damage the sensor.
O Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause a failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due
Starting and driving 5-41
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
O
Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when driving
under the following conditions:
4. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
5. MAIN switch indicator light:
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
6. Cruise set switch indicator light:
The light comes on while the vehicle
speed is controlled by the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode of the
ICC system.
- when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
- in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed
- on winding or hilly roads
- on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
- in very windy area.
O
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
SSD0550
7. Intelligent cruise control system
warning light:
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the cruise control system.
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and switch
The display is located under the tachometer.
1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
2. SET/COAST switch:
Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
5-42 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
sired cruising speed. Pushing the MAIN
switch again will turn the system completely off.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the
system is also automatically turned off. To
use the Intelligent Cruise Control again,
quickly push and release the MAIN switch
(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
or push and hold it (conventional cruise
control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION
SSD0551
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
A for longer than about 1.5
MAIN switch j
seconds.
When pushing the MAIN switch on, the Intelligent Cruise Control system display and
the CRUISE indicator light (Green) in the instrument cluster come on. After you hold
the MAIN switch on for longer than about
1.5 seconds, the Intelligent Cruise Control
system display goes out. The CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now set your de-
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch off
when not using the Intelligent Cruise Control.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The SET
indicator light will come on.) Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will
maintain the set speed.
O To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to the
previously set speed.
O The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator light will go out.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
light will go out.
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator
lights will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
b) Push
and
hold
the
RESUME/
ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
c) Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
Starting and driving 5-43
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
O When the selector lever is shifted to the
N (Neutral) position
a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O When the parking brake is applied
b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
O When the VDC operates (except ABS,
which is functional with ICC system operation)
c) Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 25
MPH (40 km/h).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.
O When the vehicle slows down more
than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set
speed
O When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)
SSD0549
Warning light
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the system warning
light (Orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and then
perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system is
malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions,
5-44 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI
dealer.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent
Cruise Control system equipped
models)
The ICC system with the preview function
identifies the need to apply emergency
braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in the
same lane and the distance to the vehicle
ahead and relative speed from it, it applies
the brake pre-pressure before the driver
depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal
free play.
For more details, refer to “Brake assist
(with preview function)” later in this section.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine
life and reduced engine performance.
O Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not
run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
O Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
O Avoid quick starts.
O Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
O Do not tow a trailer for the first 500
miles (805 km).
O Drive at moderate speeds on the
highway. Driving at high speed will
lower fuel economy.
O Avoid unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles.
O Use a proper gear range which suits
road conditions. On level roads, shift
into high gear as soon as possible.
O Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
O Keep your engine tuned up.
O Follow the recommended
maintenance schedule.
periodic
O Keep the tires inflated at the correct
pressure. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and waste fuel.
O Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment will cause
not only tire wear but also lower fuel
economy.
O Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only
when necessary.
Starting and driving 5-45
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)
O When cruising at highway speeds, it is
more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to
reduce drag.
Your vehicle is equipped with full-time AllWheel Drive (AWD).
Switching the driving mode is not necessary.
SSD0314B
The AWD warning light is located in the
meter.
The AWD warning light comes on when the
key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon
after the engine is started.
5-46 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD
system, the warning light comes on while
engine is running.
CAUTION
The warning light may blink rapidly (about
twice per second) while trying to free a
stuck vehicle due to high power train oil
temperature. The driving mode may change
to 2 wheel drive. If the warning light blinks
rapidly, stop the vehicle with the engine
idling in a safe place immediately. Then if
the light goes off after a while, you can continue driving.
O
A large difference between the diameters
of front and rear wheels will make the
warning light blink slowly (about once per
two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe
area, and idle the engine. Check that all tire
sizes are the same, tire pressure is correct
and tires are not worn.
O
Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped
vehicle with two wheels on a two wheel
dynamometer and the other two wheels
raised. Doing so may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
O
If the warning light comes on while driving, there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed
and have your vehicle checked by an
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible.
If the warning light is blinking after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible.
Do not place an AWD equipped vehicle on
a two wheel dynamometer or raise two
wheels off the ground and shift the
transmission to any D (drive) or R (reverse) position. Doing so may result in
transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
O
If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon
as possible.
O
The power train may be damaged if you
continue driving with the warning light
blinking rapidly.
Starting and driving 5-47
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
O
Make sure the automatic transmission
selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved
without depressing the button at the end
of the lever.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
SD1006MA
WARNING
O
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste
paper or rags. They may ignite and cause
a fire.
O
Never leave the engine running while the
vehicle is unattended.
O
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
O
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in
an accident.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into the street when parked on a
sloping drive way, it is a good practice
to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1
O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
2
O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
5-48 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB: j
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key (if a metal
key is used).
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The power assisted steering is designed to
use a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,
you will still have control of the vehicle.
However, much greater steering effort is
needed, especially in sharp turns or at low
speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be much
harder to operate.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
Vacuum assisted brake
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and the stopping distance
will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be
longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Starting and driving 5-49
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
BRAKE ASSIST
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking
brake is weakened or whenever the
parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors
are replaced, in order to assure the best
braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
Service Manual and can be performed by
an INFINITI dealer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This overheats the brakes,
increases wear on the brakes and pads,
and reduces gas mileage.
To help save the brakes and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
BRAKE ASSIST
WARNING
O
While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and
result in an accident.
O
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for the
brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating a greater braking
force than a conventional brake booster
even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning
or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW
FUNCTION) (Intelligent Cruise
Control system equipped model)
In addition to the brake assist, vehicles
equipped with the Intelligent Cruise Control system have a preview function.
When the Preview Function identifies the
need to apply emergency braking by
sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and the distance and relative speed from it,
it applies the brake pre-pressure before the
driver depresses the brake pedal and helps
5-50 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
improve brake response by reducing pedal
free play.
brake operation is controlled by the
system, it does not automatically decelerate the vehicle speed.
It is the driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
O This system will not operate when the
vehicle is moving at approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) or less.
O The pre-pressure function ceases when
the following conditions are met:
a) When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
O
As there is a performance limit to the
Preview Function, never rely solely on
this system. This system does not correct
careless, inattentive or absent-minded
driving, or overcome poor visibility in
rain, fog, or other bad weather. Reduce
vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
O
The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. The Preview Function may
not operate properly under the following
conditions. The vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions and the Brake
Assist will operate.
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
system sensor.
b) If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
SSD0338
O The sensor will not detect:
a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
c) Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset
in the travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
O
The Preview Function is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. Although the
Starting and driving 5-51
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
conditions, have the vehicle checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle.
— Winding or hilly roads may cause the
sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect
objects or vehicles in other lanes.
— Vehicle position in the lane may
cause the sensor to temporarily not
detect a vehicle in the same lane or
may detect objects or vehicles in
other lanes.
O
When the Preview Function operates, the
brake pedal may move slightly and may
make a small noise. This is not a system
malfunction.
How to handle the sensor
The sensor for the Preview Function is common with Intelligent Cruise Control and is
located below the front bumper.
To keep the Preview Function operating
properly, be sure to observe the following:
O Always keep the sensor clean.
Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as
not to damage them.
SSD0563
Warning light and display
When the Preview Function is not operating
properly, the buzzer sounds and the
system warning light (Orange) will come
on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine and resume driving.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is operative). Although
the Vehicle is still driveable under normal
O Do not impact the areas around the
sensor. Do not touch or disassemble
the screw located on the sensor. Doing
so could cause failure or malfunction. If
the sensor installation part is deformed
due to an accident, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause
failure or malfunction.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system controls the
brakes so the wheels will not lock when
5-52 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the
brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel
from locking and sliding. By preventing
wheel lockup, the system helps the driver
maintain steering control and helps to
minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
sation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
or vibration from the actuator under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
anti-lock system is working properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is
required while driving.
Using the system
The anti-lock brake system consists of
electronic sensors, electric pumps and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle at a
low speed in forward or reverse. When the
self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer
senses any malfunction, it switches the
anti-lock brake system off and turns on the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel.
The brake system then operates normally,
but without anti-lock assistance.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may
result in increased stopping distances.
Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate
at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h)
to completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds
will vary according to road conditions.)
When the anti-lock system senses that one
or more wheels are close to locking up, the
actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure (like
pumping the brakes very quickly). While
the actuator is working, you may feel a pul-
Self-test feature
If the light comes on during the self-test, or
while driving, take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer for repair.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated
device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but
remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces, even with the anti-lock brake
system. Stopping distances may also be
longer on rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for
safety of yourself and others rests in the
hands of the driver.
Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness.
O
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
O
When installing a spare tire, make sure it
is the proper size and type as specified
Starting and driving 5-53
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Vehicle identification” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
When accelerating or driving on a slippery
surface, the tires may spin or slide. With
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system,
sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help
improve vehicle stability.
O When the VDC system is operating, the
“SLIP” indicator in the instrument
panel blinks.
O When only the Traction Control System
(TCS) portion of the VDC system is operating, the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel blinks.
O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road
conditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these
conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.
See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
O Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator
lights illuminate in the instrument
panel. As long as these indicators are illuminated, the VDC system function is
canceled.
The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system to improve vehicle
traction. The ABLS system works when one
of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the
spinning wheel which distributes the
driving power to the other driving wheel. If
the vehicle is operated with the VDC
system turned off, all VDC system functions
and TCS functions will be turned off. The
ABLS system and ABS will still operate with
the VDC system off. When the ABLS system
is activated, the “SLIP” indicator light will
blink and you may hear a clunk noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and is not an indication of a
malfunction.
While the VDC system is operating, you
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and
hear a noise or feel a vibration from under
the hood. This is normal and indicates that
the VDC system is working properly.
The VDC system computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each
time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or backward. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a clunk noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and is not an indication of a
malfunction.
5-54 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
O
O
O
The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or due to careless
or dangerous driving. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
If engine related parts such as muffler
are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
and bushings are not INFINITI-approved
or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC
system may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle handling
performance, and the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”
indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not
operate properly and the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
O
When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”
indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
O
If wheels or tires other than those recommended are used, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the “VDC
OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or
both indicator lights may illuminate.
O
The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-55
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer or glycerin to it through the key hole.
If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key
before inserting it into the key hole.
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check anti-freeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, see
“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the
battery should be checked regularly. For
additional information, see “Battery” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system by
opening the drain plug located under the
radiator. Refill before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine coolant.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, INFINITI recommends the
use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON
tires on all four wheels. Please consult
an INFINITI dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some provinces and states prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded
tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used if desired.
Make sure they are of proper size for
the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use of tire chains
may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire
chains, make sure they are of proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are
used on vehicles with restricted tire to
vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use
Class “S” chains are designed to meet
the SAE standard minimum clearances
between the tire and the closest vehicle
suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are
determined using the factory equipped
tire size. Other types may damage your
vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end
links of the tire chain must be secured
or removed to prevent the possibility of
whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully
5-56 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
loading your vehicle when using tire
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
O a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
O
O a sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
O
O Never install tire chains on TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tires.
O a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
O
O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
O extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try
not to brake while on the ice, and avoid
any sudden steering maneuvers.
O
Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
O
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
O Tire chains must be installed only on
the rear wheels and not on the front
wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads which are clear of snow. Driving
with chains in such conditions can
cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
4. For all wheel drive:
If you install snow tires, they must also
be the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern on all four wheels.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
O
Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very
cold snow or ice can be slick and very
hard to drive on. The vehicle will have
much less traction or “grip” under these
conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet
ice until the road is salted or sanded.
O
Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care.
If accelerating or downshifting toofast,
the drive wheels will lose even more
traction.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
An engine block heater to assist extreme
cold temperature starting is available
through an INFINITI dealer.
Starting and driving 5-57
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded
electrical system or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters. You can be injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
5-58 Starting and driving
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
6 In case of emergency
Roadside assistance program............................ 6-2
Flat tire............................................................. 6-2
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....... 6-2
Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ....................... 6-3
Changing a flat tire ...................................... 6-4
Jump starting .................................................. 6-10
Push starting .................................................. 6-12
If your vehicle overheats ................................. 6-13
Towing your vehicle ........................................ 6-14
Towing recommended by INFINITI ............. 6-15
Vehicle recovery
(Freeing a stuck vehicle)............................. 6-16
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
FLAT TIRE
Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,
unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance
plan. In the event of a roadside emergency,
Roadside Assistance Service is available to
you. Please refer to your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet for details. Both the
Warranty Booklet and Roadside Assistance
Calling Card in your Owner’s Literature
Portfolio provide the Toll-Free Number to
call for assistance. Roadside Assistance is
provided 24 hours a day, 365 days a year,
for 4 years from the date sold to give
emergency roadside help, in the event of
mechanical or nonmechanical trouble(s)
such as flat tires, out-of-gas, dead battery,
lost
keys,
mechanical
breakdown,
accident, etc.
For vehicles equipped with run-flat tires,
the vehicle can be driven for a limited time
on a flat tire, see “Run-flat tires (if so
equipped)” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit or flashing continuously, one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a
signal from a sensor that is installed in
each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven
with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more
details, please refer to “Warning/indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “Tire
pressure information” in the “4. Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems” section and “Tire pressure moni-
toring system (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
WARNING
O
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label to
turn the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
O
Although you can continue driving with a
punctured run-flat tire (if so equipped),
remember that vehicle handling stability
is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving
along distance at high speeds may
damage the tires.
6-2 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88
km/h) and do not drive more than 50
miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat
tire (if so equipped). The actual distance
the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle
load, road conditions and other factors.
O
Do not tow a trailer when a run-flat (if so
equipped) tire is flat.
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
O
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)
Run-flat tires are those tires that can be
used temporarily if they are punctured.
After driving to a safe location, replace the
punctured run-flat tire, following the instructions later in “Changing a flat tire”.
For additional information, see “Wheels
and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section. Also, see the tire safety
information in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
O
Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
O
Do not tow a trailer when a run-flat tire (if
so equipped) is flat.
CAUTION
O
Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.
Although you can continue driving with a
punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long distance
at high speeds may damage the tires.
O
Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.
O
Do not enter an automated car wash with
a punctured run-flat tire.
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88
km/h) and do not drive more than 50
miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat
tire (if so equipped). The actual distance
the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle
load, road conditions and other factors.
O
Have the punctured tire replaced by your
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as
the tire’s performance capability is reduced.
WARNING
O
O
In case of emergency 6-3
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road
away from traffic.
WARNING
O
Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
is shifted into P (Park).
O
Never change tires when the vehicle is on
a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
O
Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the selector lever
in P (Park) position.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
1 at both the front
Place suitable blocks j
and back of the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may
move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
tire. Be careful not to let the subwoofer fall
down.
Pull out the jack holder before using the
jack as illustrated.
SCE0523
Getting the spare tire and tools
1 and hang the
Pull up the floor cover j
2 as illustrated.
strap to upper body j
A :
j
3 and
Turn the retainer counterclockwise j
remove the spare tire.
B :
j
SCE0447A
3 , reTurn the retainer counterclockwise j
4 and place it on the
move the subwoofer j
side of the luggage room (with the flat surface facing down), then remove the spare
In case of emergency 6-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SCE0459A
Removing wheel cap
To remove the wheel cap, use the jack rod
1 as illustrated.
covered with a cloth j
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps
or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
Jack-up point
SCE0448A
Jacking up the vehicle and
removing the damaged tire
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Remove the jack holder loosening the
jack shaft.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated above so that top of
the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack
up point. Align the jack head between
the two notches in the front or the rear
as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack
head between the notches as shown.
6-6 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
jack provided with other vehicles to your
vehicle.
The jack is designed only for lifting your
vehicle during a tire change.
SCE0458A
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
3. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns
by turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire
clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with
both hands as shown above. Remove
the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
O
Use the correct jack-up points. Never use
any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
O
Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
O
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
O
Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for
vehicles with limited slip differentials.
O
Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
WARNING
O
Don’t use the jack with the holder attached in case it breaks, or it could lead
to a personal injury.
O
Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
O
Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
In case of emergency 6-7
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence as illus1 ,j
2 ,j
3 ,j
4 ,j
5 ). Lower the
trated (j
vehicle completely.
WARNING
O
SCE0039
Installing the spare tire
The T-type spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under
the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
cause an accident.
O
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
O
Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
After vehicle has been parked for three
hours or more or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the inside of the driver side
center pillar.
For models equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS):
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the
vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This
does not indicate a system malfunction.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
6-8 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WARNING
SCE0449
Stowing the damaged tire and
tools
SCE0463
Install the jack holder in the correct direction. Refer to the illustration. Turn the jack
handle to secure the jack holder to the
jack.
Securely store the spare tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle.
O
Always make sure that the spare tire and
jacking equipment are properly secured
after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
O
The T-type (temporary) spare tire and
small size spare tire are designed for
emergency use. See “Wheels and tires”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to
call (U.S.) or Warranty Information Booklet
(Canada).
In case of emergency 6-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
O
If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
O
Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
O
Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
O
Keep battery out of the reach of children.
O
The booster battery must be rated at12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
O
Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
O
Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious
injury.
O
Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any time.
Keep hands and other objects away from
it.
O
If the battery of vehicle equipped with
the Intelligent Key system is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position, even using the
mechanical key or the valet key. Connect
the jumper cables to another vehicle, as
in the case of a discharged battery, and
then the ignitionknob can be moved from
the LOCK position. Then, jump start the
vehicle.
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to
call (U.S.) or INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
6-10 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
VQ35DE engine
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure
to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another veA , position the two vehicles (j
A
hicle j
B ) to bring
and the jumped vehicle: j
their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
SCE0450A
2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical systems
(light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an
C
to reduce explosion
old cloth j
hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence
1 →j
2 →j
3 →j
4 ).
as illustrated (j
O
Always connect positive (+) to positive
(+) and negative (−) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, etc. — not
to the battery).
O
Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
A and let it run for a few minutes.
j
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
A at about 2,000 rpm, and
vehicle j
B
start the jumped vehicle j
in the
normal manner.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and wait
3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
In case of emergency 6-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
PUSH STARTING
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be
push-started or tow-started. Attempting to
do so may cause transmission or other vehicle damage.
VK45DE engine
7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the
4 →j
3 →j
2 →j
1 ).
positive cable (j
SCE0454A
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to
call (U.S.) or INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).
Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.
6-12 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
WARNING
O
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
O
To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator cap
is removed, pressurized hot water will
spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
O
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
or air conditioner temperature control
to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. If engine overheating is caused by
climbing a long hill on a hot day, run
the engine at a fast idle (approximately
1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge
indication returns to normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take
the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
selector lever to the P (Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner switch.
Open all the windows, move the heater
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine,
stand clear to prevent getting burned.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or
get caught in, engine belts or the engine
cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start
at any time when the coolant temperature is
high.
7. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir tank with
the engine running. Add coolant to the
reservoir tank if necessary. Have your
vehicle repaired at an INFINITI dealer.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to
call (U.S.) or INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water.
If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
In case of emergency 6-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from an
INFINITI dealer. Local service operators
are generally familiar with the applicable
laws and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following precautions.
WARNING
O
Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
O
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
powertrain are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
O
Always attach safety chains before
towing.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your INFINITI Warranty
Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card for the toll-free number to
call (U.S.) or INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).
For information about towing your vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
CAUTION
O
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
6-14 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position,
and secure the steering wheel in a
straight ahead position with a rope or
similar device. Never secure the steering
wheel by turning the ignition key to the
LOCK position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism.
Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral)
position.
O
SCE0451
Two-wheel drive (2WD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
INFINITI
ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the
transmission.
If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with
the front wheels raised, always use
towing dollies under the rear wheels.
Two-wheel drive (2WD) models
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed
truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
O
Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
O
When the battery of vehicle equipped
with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, your vehicle should be towed
with the front wheels on towing dollies
or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck.
If the speed or distance must necessarily
be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission.
When towing rear wheel drive models
with the front wheels on the ground or on
towing dollies:
In case of emergency 6-15
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
SCE0452
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
INFINITI recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or the
vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the power
train.
SCE0453A
1 Do not use for towing.
j
VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a
stuck vehicle)
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook
stored with jacking tools.
6-16 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the stored place after use.
O
WARNING
O
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
O
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This
could cause them to explode and result
in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle
could also overheat and be damaged.
CAUTION
O
O
Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the vehicle recovery hooks or
main structural members of the vehicle.
Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a
vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.
Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie
downs or recovery hooks.
Always pull the cable straight out from
the front of the vehicle. Never pull onthe
hook at an angle.
O
Pulling devices should be routed so they
do not touch any part of the suspension,
steering, brake or cooling systems.
O
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
Automatic transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the
dolly manufacturer’s recommendations
when using their product.
Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
System.
In case of emergency 6-17
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
6-18 In case of emergency
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..............................................
Washing......................................................
Waxing........................................................
Removing spots...........................................
Underbody ..................................................
Glass ..........................................................
Aluminum alloy wheels ................................
Chrome parts ..............................................
Tire dressing ..............................................
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
Cleaning interior ...............................................
Floor mats ...................................................
Seat belts....................................................
Corrosion protection .........................................
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion .........................................
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion.....................................................
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
soap or a general purpose dish-washing
liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never
hot) water.
In the following cases, please wash your
vehicle as soon as possible to protect the
paint surface.
O After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain
O After driving on coastal roads
CAUTION
O
Do not use strong household soap,
strong chemical detergents, gasoline or
solvents.
O When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface
O
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
O When dust or mud builds up on the surface
O
Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must
be taken when removing caked-on dirt or
other foreign substances so that the
paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge
and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned.
Make sure that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the
vehicle.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove builtup residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax.
An INFINITI dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
O Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
O Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint
finish may dull the finish or leave swirl
marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
7-2 Appearance and care
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
from the surface of the paint to avoid
lasting damage or staining. Special
cleaning products are available at an
INFINITI dealer or any automotive accessory store.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter,
the underbody must be cleaned regularly.
This will prevent dirt and salt from building
up and causing underbody and suspension
corrosion. Before the winter period and
again in the spring, the underseal must be
checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is
normal for glass to become coated with a
film after the vehicle is parked in the hot
sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do
not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners
or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They
could damage the electrical conductors,
radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used.
Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take
the following precautions:
O Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more
easily with an oil-based tire dressing.
O Apply a light coat of tire dressing to
help prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
O Wipe off excess tire dressing using a
dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
O Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.
TIRE DRESSING
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is
applied to the tires, it may react with the
coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving
and stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using
a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.
Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a
clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft
cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
CAUTION
O
Never use benzine, thinner or any similar
material.
O
Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and should
be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents orammoniabased cleaners as they may damage the
leather natural finish.
O
Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
O
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are
fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be
maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
SAI0012B
Floor mat positioning aid
(driver’s side only)
This model includes a front floor mat
A to act as a floor mat positioning
bracket j
aid. INFINITI floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The
driver’s side floor mat has a grommet hole
incorporated in it. Simply position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket through
the floor mat grommet hole while centering
the mat in the floor pan contour.
Periodically check to make certain that the
mats are properly positioned.
7-4 Appearance and care
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them. See “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical
solvents to clean the seat belts, since these
materials may severely weaken the seat belt
webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Temperature
O The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
O Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
A temperature increase will accelerate the
rate of corrosion to those parts which are
not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use will accelerate the corrosion process.
Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
O Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle, and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those
areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
O Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
O Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
O Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash
with water as soon as possible.
Appearance and care 7-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
O
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
O
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult an INFINITI dealer.
7-6 Appearance and care
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements................................ 8-2
General maintenance ........................................ 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items .......................................................... 8-3
Maintenance precautions .................................. 8-5
Engine compartment check locations................. 8-7
Engine cooling system ...................................... 8-9
Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-9
Changing engine coolant ........................... 8-10
Engine oil ....................................................... 8-11
Checking engine oil level ........................... 8-11
Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-13
Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-15
Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-15
Brake fluid...................................................... 8-16
Window washer fluid....................................... 8-16
Battery ........................................................... 8-17
Jump starting............................................. 8-19
Drive belts ...................................................... 8-19
Spark plugs .................................................... 8-20
Replacing spark plugs ............................... 8-20
Air cleaner ...................................................... 8-21
Windshield wiper blades ................................. 8-21
Cleaning....................................................
Replacing ..................................................
Rear window wiper blade ................................
Parking brake and brake pedal ........................
Checking parking brake .............................
Checking brake pedal ................................
Brake booster............................................
Fuses .............................................................
Engine compartment..................................
Passenger compartment ............................
Keyfob battery replacement.............................
Keyfob (Except Intelligent Key)...................
Intelligent Key...........................................
Lights .............................................................
Headlights ................................................
Exterior and interior lights .........................
Wheels and tires .............................................
Tire pressure .............................................
Tire labeling ..............................................
Types of tires.............................................
Tire chains ................................................
Changing wheels and tires .........................
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-28
8-30
8-31
8-31
8-35
8-35
8-38
8-40
8-42
8-43
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your new INFINITI has been designed to
have minimum maintenance requirements
with longer service intervals to save you
both time and money. However, some dayto-day and regular maintenance is essential
to maintain your INFINITI’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure that the specified maintenance and
the general maintenance are performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
the proper maintenance care. You are a
vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance:
For your convenience, both required and
optional scheduled maintenance items are
described and listed in your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary
maintenance is performed on your INFINITI at regular intervals.
General maintenance:
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
sponsibility to perform these maintenance
procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by you, a qualified technician, or, if you
prefer, an INFINITI dealer.
Where to go for service:
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced by an
INFINITI dealer.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
check for the cause or have an INFINITI
dealer perform it promptly. In addition, you
should notify an INFINITI dealer if you
think the repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership
information systems. They are completely
qualified to work on INFINITI vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that an INFINITI
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable
and economic way.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips.
If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare (if so equipped),
to the specified pressure. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all
doors and the engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tire rotation*:
The tires should be rotated every 7,500
miles (12,000 km) to minimize tire wear
variation.
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the
vehicle should pull to either side while
driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,
there may be a need for wheel alignment.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing
may be needed.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and
other lights are all operating properly and
installed securely. Also check headlight
aim.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts): When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at
least every six months for cracks or other
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing periodic maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort.
Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure it has the proper
distance under it when depressed fully.
Check the brake booster function. Be sure
to keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake*: Check that the lever/
pedal has the proper travel and confirm
that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly
steep hill with only the parking brake applied.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to
ensure they operate smoothly and that all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints move up
and down smoothly and that the locks (if so
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (For example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate
properly and smoothly, and are installed
securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly
and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (For example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the
brake and clutch fluid levels are between
the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt
is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level location and
turning off the engine. (Wait at least 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.)
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
diately locate the trouble and correct it.
See “Precautions when starting and
driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section for exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).
with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see
“Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance
and care” section.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or
if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the
cause and have it corrected immediately.
Window washer fluid*: Check that there is
adequate fluid in the tank.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold and
the engine is turned off. Check the lines for
proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust.
It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
O
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
the parking brake securely and block the
wheels to prevent the vehicle from
moving. Move the selector lever to P
(Park) position.
O
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
O
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
If you must work with the enginerunning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and
tools away from moving fans, belts and
any other moving parts.
by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel
lines are under high pressure even when
the engine is off.
O
It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and any jewelry, such as
rings, watches, etc. before working on
your vehicle.
CAUTION
O
Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
O
If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
O
Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it
with safety stands.
O
Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks
away from the fuel tank and battery.
O
On gasoline engine models with the Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, the
fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced
O
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down.
O
Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
O
Never leave any engine or automatic
transmission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
O
Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil,
engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section gives instructions regarding only
those items which are relatively easy for an
owner to perform.
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also
available.
See
“Owner’s
Manual/
Service Manual order information” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect your warranty coverage. If in
doubt about any servicing, have it done by
an INFINITI dealer.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DE engine
1. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Battery
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Radiator filler cap
9. Drive belts
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Air cleaner
SDI1991
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
VK45DE engine
1. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Battery
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Window washer fluid reservoir
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Radiator filler cap
9. Drive belts
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Air cleaner
SDI1987
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a high-quality, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion
inhibitors, therefore additional cooling
system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
O
O
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
The radiator is equipped with a pressure
type radiator cap. To prevent engine
damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
Outside temperature
down to
°C
°F
−35
−30
Antifreeze
Demineralized
water/
distilled
water
50%
50%
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to
use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant (green) or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and
50% demineralized or distilled water. The
use of other types of coolant solutions or
coolant colors, such as orange, may damage
your engine cooling system.
SDI1385A
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant
2 , add coolant up to
level is below MIN j
1 level. If the reservoir tank is
the MAX j
empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening
and also add it to the reservoir tank up to
1 .
the MAX level j
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
If the engine cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by an
INFINITI dealer.
O Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine
overheating.
WARNING
O
O
O
O
VQ35DE
SDI1525A
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
O Major cooling system repairs should be
performed by an INFINITI dealer. The
service procedures can be found in the
appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.
To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
Keep coolant out of the reach of children
and pets.
VQ35DE engine
B at the
1. Open radiator drain plug j
bottom of radiator, and remove radiator
A .
filler cap j
O Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
ENGINE OIL
O Waste coolant must be disposed of
properly. Check your local regulations.
B se2. Close the radiator drain plug j
curely after the coolant is drained.
VK45DE engine
Contact an INFINITI dealer if replacement
is required.
3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper
mixture of anti-freeze solution and
demineralized water/distilled water.
Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX
level. Then install the radiator filler cap
A .
j
4. Start the engine and warm it up until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
Then race the engine 2 or 3 times under
no load. Watch the engine coolant temperature gauge for signs of overheating.
5. Stop the engine. After it completely
cools down, refill the radiator up to the
filler opening. Fill the reservoir tank up
to the MAX level. Check the drain plug
for any sign of leakage.
6. Recheck the coolant level after the vehicle has been driven for a day.
VQ35DE
SDI1386B
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
VK45DE
SDI1240B
SDI1402B
VQ35DE
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
1 . If the oil level is below
and L marks j
2 , remove the oil filler cap
the L mark j
and pour recommended oil through the
3 .
opening. Do not overfill j
6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.
VK45DE
SDI1410B
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount
of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the breakin period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND
FILTER
Change the engine oil and filter according
to the maintenance intervals shown in the
INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.
CAUTION
Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any
other part of the vehicle for jack support.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than
15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack
stands.
O Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
O A suitable adapter should be attached
to the jack stand saddle.
VQ35DE
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain
1 .
plug j
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
1
3. Remove the drain plug j
with a
wrench and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.
a. Remove the small plastic clips at the
rear side of the undercover.
b. Then remove the other bolts that hold
the undercover in place.
SDI1532A
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil
may be hot.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a
slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)
1
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug j
with a new washer. Securely tighten the
1 with a wrench.
drain plug j
SDI1550A
O Check your local regulations.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
2 . Remove the oil filter by
wrench j
turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
Be sure to remove any old rubber
gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
CAUTION
When filling oil, do not pull out the dipstick.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29 to 39 Nzm)
VK45DE
O Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
perature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the
proper amount of oil in the engine.
Do not use excessive force.
9. Refill engine with recommended oil and
install the cap securely.
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
CAUTION
The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while
filling the engine with oil.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section for
drain and refill capacity. The drain and
refill capacity depends on the oil tem-
1. Install the engine undercover into position as the following steps.
a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip
out.
b. Hold the engine undercover into position.
c. Insert the clips through the undercover
into the hole in the frame, then push
the center of the clip in to lock the clip
in place.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
d. Install the other bolts that hold the undercover in place. Be careful not to strip
the bolts or over-tighten them.
If checking or replacement is required, we
recommend an INFINITI dealer for servicing.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
O
Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
O
Try to avoid direct skin contact with used
oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
O
Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CAUTION
O
Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do
not mix with other fluids.
O
Using automatic transmission fluid other
than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will
cause deterioration in driveability and
automatic transmission durability, and
may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid
is also described on caution labels located
in the engine compartment.
SDI1408B
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked using the
HOT range at fluid temperatures of 122 to
176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range
at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to
30°C).
CAUTION
O
Do not overfill.
O
Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
BRAKE FLUID
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
Do not add synthetic brake fluid. The use of
improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stopping
ability.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces.
This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,
immediately wash the surface with water.
SDI1610A
Check the fluid level in the brake fluid resA . If the fluid is below the MIN line
ervoir j
or the brake warning light comes on, add
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid or equivalent to DOT 3 fluid up to the
MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be thoroughly
checked by an INFINITI dealer.
SDI1388A
Add fluid when the low washer fluid
warning light comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the
winter season, add a windshield washer
anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
BATTERY
WARNING
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
CAUTION
O
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrateand water.
O Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Any corrosion should be washed off
with a solution of baking soda and
water.
O Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
days or longer, disconnect the (—)
negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant
for window washer solution. This may result
in damage to the paint.
O
Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
WARNING
O
Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush
with water for at least 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Do not operate the vehicle if the battery
fluid is low. Low battery fluid cancause a
higher load on the battery which can
generate heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.
O
When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
O
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
O
Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
A .
3. Tighten cell plugs j
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
DI0137MA
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should
1 and
be between the UPPER LEVEL j
2 lines.
LOWER LEVEL j
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
A .
1. Remove the cell plugs j
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER
1 line.
LEVEL j
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
DRIVE BELTS
SDI1480C
If the side of the battery is not visible,
check the distilled water level by looking
1 indicates OK and
directly above the cell; j
2 needs more to be added.
j
VQ35DE
1. Power steering fluid pump
SDI1549A
1. Water pump
2. Alternator
2. Alternator
VK45DE
3. Crankshaft pulley
3. Crankshaft pulley
JUMP STARTING
4. Air conditioner compressor
4. Power steering fluid pump
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.
.: Tension checking points
5. Air conditioner compressor
SDI1411B
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK
position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of
unusual wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness. If the belt is in poor
condition or loose, have it replaced or
adjusted by an INFINITI dealer.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off
and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
damage the spark plugs.
SDI0145C
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI
dealer for servicing.
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the platinumA spark plugs as frequently as the
tipped j
conventional type spark plugs since they
will last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log
in
your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”, but do not reuse them by cleaning
or regapping.
Always replace with recommended
platinum-tipped spark plugs.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
AIR CLEANER
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
If maintenance is required,
INFINITI dealer for servicing.
see
an
The filter element should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance log shown in your “INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air
cleaner housing and the cover with a damp
cloth.
O
After wiper blade replacement, return the
wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the engine
hood is opened.
O
Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
O
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.
WARNING
O
O
ter. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
replace the blades.
CAUTION
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
removed can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner not only cleans
the air, it stops the flame if the engine
backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do
not drive with the air cleaner removed,
and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.
CLEANING
Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result in
serious injury.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear wa-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
DI1018MC
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Pull the wiper arm.
A , then
2. Push and hold the release tab j
move the wiper blade down the wiper
1 .
arm to remove j
3. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper
arm until a click sounds.
SDI1390B
If necessary, clean the windshield washer
A with a needle or small pin j
B .
nozzle j
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL
Contact an INFINITI dealer if checking or
replacement is required.
SDI1391F
DI1020MO
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
From the released position, depress the
parking brake pedal slowly and firmly, and
check the distance between the initial and
A . If it is out of
final position of the pedal j
the range shown above, see an INFINITI
dealer.
With the engine running, check the distance
between the upper surface of the pedal and
A . If it is out of the range
the metal floor j
shown above, see an INFINITI dealer.
Range: 4 to 5 notches under a depressing
force of 44 lb (196 N).
Range: 3.7 in (95 mm) or more under a depressing force of 110 lb (490 N).
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is
adjusting brakes.
equipped
with
self-
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time
the brake pedal is applied.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
FUSES
WARNING
See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, it will make a high
pitched scraping or screeching sound
when the vehicle is in motion whether or
not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the
brakes checked as soon as possible if the
wear indicator sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information,
see the appropriate maintenance log
shown in your “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, press and release
the brake pedal several times. When
brake pedal movement (distance of
travel) remains the same from one
pedal application to the next, continue
on to the next step.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, start
the engine. The pedal height should
drop a little.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the
pedal height should not change.
4. Run the engine for one minute without
depressing the brake pedal, then turn it
off. Depress the brake pedal several
times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression
as the vacuum is released from the
booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, see
an INFINITI dealer.
SDI1751
A is
Two types of fuses are used. Type j
used in the fuse boxes in the engine comB is used in the passenger
partment. Type j
compartment fuse box.
A fuses are provided as spare fuses.
Type j
They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.
A fuses can be installed in the enType j
gine compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
2. Open the engine hood and remove the
cover on the compartment of the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder
cover by pushing the tab and lifting the
cover up as illustrated.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.
SDI1752
A fuse is used to replace a type
If a type j
B fuse, the type j
A fuse will not be level
j
with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance
of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed
in the fuse box securely.
B fuses cannot be installed in the
Type j
A
underhood fuse boxes. Only use type j
fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.
SDI1479A
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box
cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and headlight switch are OFF.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SDI1753
A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open j
B .
new fuse j
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by
an INFINITI dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only
genuine NISSAN parts.
SDI1962
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are in the OFF position.
CAUTION
1 .
2. Open the fuse box lid j
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box
cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
2 .
j
A , replace it with a
4. If the fuse is open j
B . Spare fuses j
3 are stored
new fuse j
in the fuse box.
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by
an INFINITI dealer.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT
3 with a new one.
2. Replace the battery j
4 up.
Set the battery with the “—” side j
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent
Make sure that the ! side faces the
bottom case.
3. Close the lid securely.
4. Push the keyfob button two or three
times to check its operation.
See an INFINITI dealer if you need any assistance for replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 4
above.
SDI1754
O Be careful not to touch the circuit board
and the battery terminal.
O An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
SPA1374D
KEYFOB (Except Intelligent Key)
Replace the battery as follows:
1 using a suitable tool j
2 .
1. Open the lid j
O The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it gets wet, immediately wipe it
completely dry.
O When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the keyfob.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
SPA1875
SPA1876
B of
wrapped with a cloth into the slit j
the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part.
INTELLIGENT KEY
CAUTION
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery and removed parts.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent
Make sure that the ! side faces the
bottom of the case.
Replace the battery as follows:
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the
Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower
parts, and then push them together until they are securely closed.
A
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver j
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
5. Push the buttons two or three times to
check its operation.
See an INFINITI dealer if you need any assistance for replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5
above.
O Be careful not to touch the circuit board
and the battery terminal as it could
cause a malfunction.
O An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
O When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.
FCC Notice:
there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and the receiver
— Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
LIGHTS
1. Clearance light/Daytime running light
(Canada)
2. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam)
3. Front turn signal light
4. Front side marker light
5. Interior light/Map light
6. Ceiling light (if so equipped)
7. Rear personal light
8. Luggage light (side)
9. Front fog light
10. Step light
11. High-mounted stop light
12. Luggage light (roof)
13. License plate light
14. Back-up light
15. Tail/Stop/Turning signal lights
16. Rear side marker light
SDI1976
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
HEADLIGHTS
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Replacing
Item
If replacement is required, see an INFINITI
dealer.
Xenon headlight bulb:
WARNING
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.
21
T20
5/21
T20
Front side marker light
3.8
T10
Front fog light*
35
H8
(LED)
—
3.8
T10
Front turn signal
Clearance/Daytime running light
Rear combination light
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce
a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,
never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at
an INFINITI dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
Tail/Stop/Turn signal lights*
Side marker light
Back-up light
18
T16
License plate light
5
T10
(LED)
—
Map light
8
—
Ceiling light (if so equipped)
8
—
Rear personal light
8
—
Step light*
5
—
Luggage (roof, side) light
8
—
1.32
—
High-mounted stop light*
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MDI0006
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens and/or cover.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
A Front side marker light j
B Front turn signal j
C Clearance light
j
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SDI1727A
Back-up light
SDI1528A
Rear side marker light
SDI1529A
Map light
SDI1728
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
Vanity mirror light
SDI1399C
Rear personal, Luggage light
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
License plate light
SDI1407B
Ceiling light (if so equipped)
SDI1530A
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SDI1729
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.
and “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressure (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire
and Loading Information label (if so
equipped) under the “Cold Tire Pressure”
heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side
center pillar. Tire pressures should be
checked regularly because:
O Most tires naturally lose air over time.
O Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been
parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire life
and vehicle handling.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit or flashing continuously, one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a
signal from a sensor that is installed in
each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in the “4. Display screen, heater, air
conditioner and audio systems” section,
“Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section,
WARNING
O Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
O The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped). Do not
load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle
may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to
premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and
could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in
failure of other vehicle components.
O Before taking a long trip, or when
ever you heavily load your vehicle,
use a tire pressure gauge to ensure
that the tire pressures are at the
specified level.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O Do not drive your vehicle over 85
MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
equipped with high speed rated
tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
(137 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible
injury.
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
SDI1948
Tire and loading information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum numj
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: See “loading inforj
mation” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.
3 Original size: The size of the tires
j
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
j
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by
the manufacturer to provide the best
balance of tire wear, vehicle handling
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”
j
later in this section.
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
j
size (if so equipped)
SDI1949
Checking tire pressure
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Size
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
Cold Tire
Inflation
Pressure
P265/60R18 220 kPa, 32
P265/50R20 psi
Front
Original
Tire
Rear
P265/60R18 220 kPa, 32
Original
P265/50R20 psi
Tire
Spare Tire T175/90D18 420 kPa, 60
psi
3. Remove the gauge.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed Rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
SDI1575
Example
SDI1951
TIRE LABELING
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
j
Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of
a recall.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters
of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
6. Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 3103 means the 31st
week of 2003. If these numbers are
missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.
3 Tire ply composition and material
j
Example
SDI1607
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
j
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of Transportation”. The
symbol can be placed above,
below or to the left or right of
Tire Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identification mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others.
4
j Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
j
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-
ways use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
j
Indicates whether the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
7 The word “radial”
j
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
j
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering or bears manufacturer,
brand and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
O
When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(Examples: Summer, All Season, or Snow
and construction. An INFINITI dealer
may be able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
O
Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
O
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
O
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
INFINITI specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance for
use all year around, including snowy and
icy road conditions. All Season tires are
identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on
the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better
snow traction than all season tires and may
be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on
dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends
the use of snow or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load
rating to the original equipment tires. If
you do not, it can adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and
may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, INFINITI recommends the use
of snow or all season tires on all four
wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However, some
provinces and states prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on
wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than
that of non-studded snow tires.
Run-flat tires (if so equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, you can continue driving to a safe location even if they are punctured. Always
use run-flat tires of the same size on all
four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability.
If necessary, contact an INFINITI dealer
for assistance.
O Frequently check the tire pressure information display on the monitor
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.14/S50-D/V5.0 X
screen and adjust pressure of each tire
properly. (The order of the tire pressure
figures displayed on the screen does
not correspond with the actual order of
the tire position.)
It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is
under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as described earlier in this section. If
the tire becomes under-inflated or flat
while driving, the low tire pressure warning
light will come on or flash continuously.
Low tire pressure:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the low tire pressure warning
light will illuminate.
Flat tire:
If the vehicle is being driven with one or
more flat tires, the low tire pressure
warning light will flash continuously and a
chime will sound for 10 seconds.
The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the warning light
will flash continuously. When the Flat tire
warning is activated, have the system reset
and the tire checked and replaced if necessary by an INFINITI dealer. Even if the tire
is inflated to the specified COLD tire pressure, the warning light will continue to
flash until the system is reset by an INFINITI dealer.
O
Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH (88
km/h) and do not drive more than 50
miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat
tire (if so equipped). The actual distance
the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle
load, road conditions and other factors.
O
Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
O
Do not tow a trailer when a run-flat tire is
flat.
If the low tire pressure warning light comes
on:
O Do not exceed 55 MPH (88 km/h).
O Increase your following distance to
allow for increased stopping distances.
O Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering and hard braking.
O Do not tow a trailer.
WARNING
O
Although you can continue driving with a
punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long distance
at high speeds may damage the tire.
CAUTION
O
Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.
O
Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O
Do not enter an automated car wash with
a punctured run-flat tire.
O
Have the punctured tire replaced by an
INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as
the tire’s performance capability is reduced.
All-wheel drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
O
O
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears.
ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. Contact an
INFINITI dealer.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads which are clear of snow. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of
proper size for the tires on your vehicle and
are installed according to the chain manufacturer instructions. Use only SAE class S
chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”
chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire
and the closest vehicle suspension or body
component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains
or cables). The minimum clearances are de-
termined using the factory equipped tire
size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the
possibility of whipping action damage to
the fenders or undercarriage. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
CAUTION
O
Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
O
Never install tire chains on a T-type spare
tire or a punctured run-flat tire, as this
could damage your vehicle.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads that are clear of snow. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
O After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each tire rotation interval.
SDI1756
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
WARNING
O Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
O Do not include the spare tire in the
tire rotation.
O For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual for tire replacing procedures.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
MDI0004B
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
O Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging
or objects caught in the tread. If
excessive wear, cracks, bulging or
deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
O The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
O Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because some
tire damage may not be obvious.
Replace the tires as necessary to
prevent tire failure and possible
personal injury.
O Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety
Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
speed rating and load carrying capacity as
originally equipped. See “Specifications”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for recommended types and
sizes of tires and wheels.
WARNING
O
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, biasbelted, radial or run-flat), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of
these effects may lead to accidents and
could result in serious personal injury.
O
If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could cause
premature tire wear, degrade vehicle
handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking effi-
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
ciency and/or early brake pad wear.
Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
O
O
O
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the
low tire pressure warning light will flash.
Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by INFINITI could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not install a deformed wheel or tire
even if it has been repaired. Such wheels
or tires could have structural damage
and could fail without warning.
O
The use of retread tires is not recommended.
O
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
CAUTION
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, radial
or run-flat), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the
front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears
(AWD models).
Wheel balance
O Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
O Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
O Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
O INFINITI recommends that the side
walls of road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it
is used during winter.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the rear wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire (T-type))
Observe the following precautions if the
T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
your vehicle could be damaged or involved
in an accident.
CAUTION
O
O
The T-type spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first
opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
Drive carefully while the T-type spare tire
is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
braking while driving.
O
Periodically check the T-type spare tire
inflation pressure, and always keep it at
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
O
Always keep the pressure of the full size
spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as
indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. For the label location, see
“Tire and Loading Information label” in
the “9. Technical and consumer
information”.
O
Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster
than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
O
Do not use tire chains on a T-type spare
tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and
may cause damage to the vehicle.
When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the T-type spare tire should
be used on the front wheel and the original tire used on the rear wheels (drive
wheels). Use tire chains only on the two
rear original tires.
Tire tread of the T-type spare tire will wear
at a faster rate than the original tire. Replace the T-type spare tire as soon as the
tread wear indicators appear.
Because the T-type spare tire is smaller
than the original tire, ground clearance is
reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle
do not drive over obstacles. Also do not
drive the vehicle through an automatic
car wash since it may get caught.
Do not use the T-type spare tire on other
vehicles.
O
O
O
O
O
O
Do not use more than one T-type spare
tire at the same time.
Do not tow a trailer while the T-type
spare tire is installed.
8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2
Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation....... 9-5
Recommended SAE viscosity number ........... 9-6
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations ......................... 9-6
Specifications................................................... 9-8
Engine......................................................... 9-8
Wheels and tires........................................ 9-10
Dimensions and weights............................ 9-10
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country .............................................. 9-11
Vehicle identification ...................................... 9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ... 9-11
Vehicle identification number (Chassis
number) .................................................... 9-11
Engine serial number ................................. 9-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label..... 9-12
Emission control information label ............. 9-13
Tire and loading information label .............. 9-13
Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-13
Installing front license plate ...........................
Vehicle loading information ............................
Terms........................................................
Vehicle load capacity .................................
Loading tips ..............................................
Measurement of weights............................
Towing a trailer ...............................................
Maximum load limits .................................
Towing load/specification chart .................
Towing safety ............................................
Flat towing ................................................
Uniform tire quality grading.............................
Emission control system warranty ...................
Reporting safety defects (US only) ...................
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (US only) ..................................................
Event data recorders .......................................
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information.....................................................
In the event of a collision...........................
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
9-14
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-18
9-18
9-19
9-19
9-21
9-21
9-24
9-25
9-26
9-26
9-27
9-28
9-29
9-29
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
US measure
23-3/4 gal
Capacity (Approximate)
Imp measure
19-3/4 gal
Liter
90
6-1/8 qt
5-1/8 qt
5.8
VQ35DE
5 qt
4-1/8 qt
4.7
VK45DE
5-1/2 qt
4-5/8 qt
5.2
VQ35DE
4-5/8 qt
3-7/8 qt
4.4
VK45DE
VQ35DE
VK45DE
VQ35DE
10-5/8 qt
9-1/8 qt
7/8 qt
7/8 qt
—
—
8-3/4 qt
7-5/8 qt
3/4 qt
3/4 qt
—
—
10.0
8.6
0.8
0.8
—
—
—
—
—
Fuel
Engine oil (Drain and refill)*6
With oil filter change
Without oil filter
change
VK45DE
Cooling system
With reservoir
Reservoir
Automatic transmission fluid
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Refill to the proper fluid level according to the instructions
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air conditioning system lubricants
—
—
—
Windshield washer fluid
—
—
—
Recommended
specifications
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1
For VK45DE engine
O API Certification Mark*2, *3
O API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3
O ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2, *3
For VQ35DE engine
O API Certification Mark*2, *3
O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*3
O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*3
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*4
API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*7
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid*8
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*10
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
HFC-134a (R-134a)*9
NISSAN A/C System Oil
Type S or exact equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
*1: For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.
*3: For additional information, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section.
*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*5: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.
*6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*7: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).
*8: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended
brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.
*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.
*10: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
VK45DE engine
In order to maintain engine and exhaust
system durability and performance, unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96) must
be used.
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but
only under the following precautions:
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially
with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill
up with unleaded premium gasoline as
soon as possible.
O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
VQ35DE engine
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
For improved vehicle performance,
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 91 AKI number (Research octane
number 96).
CAUTION
O
Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
O
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will
damage the three-way catalyst.
O
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on E-85
fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel
system components and is not covered by
the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.
Gasoline specifications
INFINITI recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many
of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. INFINITI supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE
and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for
your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
O The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
O If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.
If any undesirable driveability problems
such as engine stalling and hard hot
starting are experienced after using
oxygenate-blend
fuels,
immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel
with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately
85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible
Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in
your vehicle. U.S. government regulations
require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to
be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that
region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
any fuel additives (i.e. fuel injector cleaner,
octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can
be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
tane rating, or if you hear steady spark
knock while holding a steady speed on
level roads, have your dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in
knocking, after-run or overheating. This in
turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the
above symptoms are encountered, have
your vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer
or other competent service facility.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
even when using gasoline of the stated oc-
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
STI0367A
1 API certification mark
j
2 API service symbol
j
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section.
INFINITI recommends the use of an energy
conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
oil additives. The use of an oil additive is
not necessary when the proper oil type is
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of this,
it is important that the engine oil viscosity
be selected based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. The recommended SAE
viscosity number chart shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in
change intervals.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil
and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life.
Damage to engines caused by improper
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and
filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered
by the new INFINITI vehicle limited warranties.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
NUMBER
The air conditioning system in this
INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant, Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or
the exact equivalents.
Your engine was filled with a high quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not
have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you use
your vehicle. Operation under the following
conditions may require more frequent oil
and filter changes.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
O repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
O driving in dusty conditions
O extensive idling
O towing a trailer
O stop and go commuting
Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance
schedule.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT
RECOMMENDATIONS
TI1028-C
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all
ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,
10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the
ambient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning system service. An INFINITI dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing
your air conditioning system.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ35DE
VK45DE
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle
Gasoline, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement
6-cylinder, V-slanted
at 60°
8-cylinder, V-slanted
at 90°
3.760 3 3.205 (95.5
3 81.4)
3.661 3 3.256 (93.0
3 82.7)
Bore 3 Stroke
in (mm)
Displacement
cu in (cm3)
Firing order
Idle speed
rpm
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
degree/rpm
Spark plug gap (Normal)
Service option
in (mm)
Camshaft operation
274.2 (4,494)
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
See the emission control information label
on the underside of the hood.
Standard
Spark plug
213.45 (3,498)
1-2-3-4-5-6
Hot type
Cold type
PLFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11
PLFR4A-11
PLFR4A-11
PLFR6A-11
PLFR6A-11
0.043 (1.1)
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Timing chain
VQ35DE
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TI0001-E
STI0109C
VQ45DE
The spark ignition system of this vehicle
meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Road wheel
Type
Size
Offset
Aluminum
18 x 8JJ
20 x 8JJ
1.57 (40)
Size
Pressure (Cold)
Tire
Type
Conventional
P265/60R18
P265/50R20
Run-flat*
P265/50R20
Spare (T-type)*
T175/90D18
in (mm)
Overall length
in (mm)
189.1 (4,803)
Overall width
in (mm)
75.8 (1,925)
Overall height
in (mm)
65.9 (1,672.6)
Front tread
in (mm)
62.7 (1,592)
Rear tread
in (mm)
64.6 (1,642)
Wheelbase
in (mm)
112.2 (2,850)
Gross vehicle weight rating
220 kPa, 32 psi
Gross axle weight rating
420 kPa, 60 psi
*: if so equipped
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label on the driver’s side lock pillar.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR
VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to travel in another
country, you should first find out if the fuel
available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded engine gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your
vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is
not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify
the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, vehicle specifications
may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
STI0345
STI0346
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(Chassis number)
The vehicle identification number plate is
attached as shown. This number is the
identification for your vehicle and is used
in the vehicle registration.
The number is stamped as shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
VQ35DE
STI0303B
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
VK45DE
STI0266C
STI0347
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information,
such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR),
month and year of manufacture, Vehicle
Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it
carefully.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
STI0348
STI0349
STI0350
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached as shown.
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label affixed as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed inside of the hood as shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
1. Temporarily place the license plate
1 while aligning part j
2 of the
bracket j
3 of the rear
front bumper with part j
surface of the license plate bracket.
2. To determine where to drill the hole,
mark along both sides of the mounting
4 .
hole by using a felt-tip pen j
3. Remove the license plate bracket and
connect the arcs to form ovals. Mark
the point in the center of each oval.
These are the pilot drilling locations.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a
0.39 inch (10 mm) drill bit at the
5 . (Be sure that the
marked locations j
drill only goes through the fascia, or
damage to the nut may occur.)
6 into the hole on
5. Insert grommets j
the fascia.
STI0407
Use the following steps to mount the license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm
that the following parts are enclosed in the
vinyl bag.
O License plate bracket
O J-nut x 2
O Screw x 2
7 into
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver j
the grommet hole to turn the threaded
8 .
part of the grommet 90° j
9 into the license plate
7. Insert a J-nut j
bracket before placing the license plate
bracket on the fascia.
O Screw grommet x 2
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
8. Install the license plate bracket with
10 .
screws j
9. Install the license plate with bolts that
are no longer than 0.55 inch (14 mm).
O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
WARNING
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
O It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
O
O
Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -
maximum total combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers,
luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S.
label.
O GCWR
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before loading
your vehicle:
O Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-
hicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids,
emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
(Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - maximum total weight rating
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo,
and trailer.
O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
O Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight to the value. Examples are shown
in the following illustration.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs) or (650 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
LTI0152
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.
LOADING TIPS
O The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
O Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
loading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
WARNING
O Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
O Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs. If
you do, parts of your vehicle can
break, tire damage could occur, or
it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal injury.
O Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the tire,
but can also cause unsafe vehicle
handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result
in a serious accident and personal
injury. Failures caused by over-
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded,
drive to a scale and weigh the front and
the rear wheels separately to determine
axle loads. Individual axle loads should
not exceed either of the gross axle
weight rating (GAWR). The total of the
axle loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification
label. If weight ratings are exceeded,
move or remove items to bring all
weights below the ratings.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TOWING A TRAILER
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
O
For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 MPH
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
TI1011M
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer will place
additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle
handling, braking and performance and may
lead to accidents.
An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is
available
on
the
website
at
www.infiniti.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and
the special equipment required for proper
towing.
WARNING
CAUTION
O
Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km).
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
load equals trailer weight plus its cargo
weight.
O When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) should not exceed the value
specified in the following Towing
Load/Specification Chart.
The GCWR equals the combined weight of
the towing vehicle (including passengers
and cargo) plus the total trailer load.
Towing loads greater than these or using
improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced on very
steep grades or in low traction situations
(for example, on slippery boat ramps).
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the following Towing
Load/Specification Chart. The total trailer
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Z 05.11.14/S50-D/V5.0 X
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures are not covered by
INFINITI warranties.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 to 11% of
the total trailer load within the maximum
tongue load limits shown in the following
Towing Load/Specifications Chart. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
cargo to allow for proper tongue load.
TI1012MA
Maximum gross vehicle weight/
maximum gross axle weight
A of the towing
The gross vehicle weight j
vehicle must not exceed. GVWR shown on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The gross vehicle weight equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
B
addition, front or rear gross axle weight j
must not exceed GAWR shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
TOWING SAFETY
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
Unit: lb (kg)
VQ35DE
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1
3,500 (1,588)
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT*2
VK45DE
350 (159)
8,000 (3,629)
8,100 (3,674)
Sway Control Device (SCD)
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to help
avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough
road surfaces or passing trucks.
Hitch ball
*1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. INFINITI recommends the use of a
tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg).
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
*2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices are
not offered by INFINITI. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designed sway control device for your trailer.
O The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on top
of the ball.
O Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
O The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
shank should be no more than 1/169
smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
O The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
be at least 2 threads showing beyond
the lock washer and nut.
rear, where practical, remove the hitch
and/or receiver when not in use. After
the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes
to prevent exhaust fumes, water or dust
from entering the passenger compartment.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000
lb (909 kg).
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500
lb (1,510 kg).
CAUTION
O
Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
O
The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
O
Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
O
To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck from the
O
Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures
O When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
O Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturers’ specifications.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
should be crossed and should be attached
to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or
axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the
chains to permit turning corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type
module/converter must be used to provide
power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses
the vehicle battery as a direct power source
for all trailer lights while using the vehicle
tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as
a signal source. The module/converter must
draw no more than 15 milliamps from the
stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a
module/converter that exceeds these power
requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer
to obtain the proper equipment and to have
it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, contact an
INFINITI dealer or reputable trailer dealer.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly
to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
O Be certain your vehicle maintains a
level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive
the vehicle if it has an abnormal
nose-up or nose-down condition; check
for improper tongue load, overload,
worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
O Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
O Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
O Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shift while driving.
O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
O Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half.
O Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed. Some states or provinces have
specific speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
O Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-
O When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand. Move
your hand in the direction in which you
want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when
you are backing up.
O Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking
on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and
apply the parking brake, and then move
the transmission selector lever into the
P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before
blocking the wheels and applying the
parking brake, transmission damage
could occur.
O When going down a hill, shift into a
lower gear and use the engine braking
effect. When going up a long grade,
downshift the transmission to a lower
gear and reduce speed to reduce
chances of engine overloading and/or
overheating.
O If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air
conditioning system is on, turn off the
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high
and setting the temperature control to
the HOT position.
O Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500
miles (800 km).
O Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the
INFINITI Service and Manual Guide.
O When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn
than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal
turning radius during the turn.
O Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip
the steering wheel, steer straight
ahead, and immediately (but gradually)
reduce vehicle speed. This combination
will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.
O Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than
normal passing. Remember the length
of the trailer must also pass the other
vehicle before you can safely change
lanes.
O To maintain engine braking efficiency
and electrical charging performance,
do not use overdrive.
O Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
O When stopped in traffic for long periods
of time in hot weather, put the vehicle
in the P (Park) position.
When towing a trailer, change fluid in the
transmission more frequently.
For additional information, see the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
O Increase your following distance to
allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
O
O Do not use cruise control while towing a
trailer.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
O
Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
O Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
O
O
DO NOT tow any automatic transmission
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts due
to lack of transmission lubrication.
For emergency towing procedures, see
“Towing recommended by INFINITI” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the
dolly manufacturer’s recommendations
when using their product.
DOT (Department Of Transportation)
Quality Grades: All passenger car tires
must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)
Your INFINITI is covered by the following
emission warranties.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
INFINITI.
For US:
O Emission Defects Warranty
O Emissions Performance Warranty
(See Warranty Information Booklet for
details.)
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and
Roadside Assistance Information (Canada
only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If
you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has
become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
O INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 47038, Gardena, CA 902476838
O Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
You may notify INFINITI by contacting
our Consumer Affairs Department, tollfree, at 1-800-662-6200.
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) should never be tested using a two
wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel that
your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it
is placed on a dynamometer. Using the
wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states/
areas, your vehicle may be required to be in
what is called the “ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the “ready condition”
can be obtained by ordinary usage of the
vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Turn the ignition
switch to the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the
I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the
MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the
I/M test condition is “ready”.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not
ready” condition, drive the vehicle through
the following pattern to set the vehicle to
the “ready condition”. If you cannot or do
not want to perform the driving pattern, an
INFINITI dealer can conduct it for you.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions,
and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to
idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the C
and H (normal operating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
EVENT DATA RECORDERS
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal
for a moment, then drive the vehicle at
a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96
km/h) for at least 9 minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55
km/h) and maintain the speed for 20
seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h) and maintain the speed for at
least 3 minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission gear selector lever in the “P” or
“N” position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of
computers that monitor and control a number of systems to optimize performance
and help service technicians with diagnosis and repair. Depending on the equipment on your vehicle, some of the computers monitor emission control systems,
braking systems, engine systems, transmission systems, tire pressure systems,
and air bag systems. Some data about vehicle operation may be stored in the computers for use during servicing. Other data
may be stored if a crash event occurs. For
example, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and seat belt use by the driver or
passenger may be recorded, depending on
vehicle equipment. These types of systems
are sometimes called Event Data Recorders.
Special equipment can be used to access
the electronic data that may be stored in
the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not recorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealers
have equipment to access some of this
data; others may also have this equipment.
The data may be retrieved during routine
vehicle servicing or for special research. It
might also be accessed with the consent of
the vehicle owner or lessee in response to
a request by law enforcement, or as otherwise required or permitted by law.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one
more time.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode
is acceptable between steps. Do not stop
the engine until step 7 is completed.
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL
ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the
best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this
manual is the same one used by the factory
trained technicians working at authorized
INFINITI dealerships. Also available are
genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and
genuine INFINITI Service and Owner’s
Manuals for older INFINITI models.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000
model year and later, contact:
Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999
model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this
model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
contact an INFINITI dealer. For the phone
number and location of an INFINITI dealer
in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction
Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual
INFINITI representative will assist you.
Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
INFINITI models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the
use of non-genuine collision parts in order
to cut costs, among other reasons.
Insist on the use of Genuine
INFINITI Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored
using parts made to INFINITI’s original exacting specifications — if you want to help
it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent
and your repair shop to only use Genuine
INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does
not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor does
INFINITI’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your
warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI
Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of
your lease.
INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple
zones to minimize the risk that the hood
will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built-in
safety features. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Technical and consumer information 9-29
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states and certain territories/
provinces, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states and
provinces have enacted laws that restrict
insurance companies from authorizing the
use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help
protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information,
visit us at:
www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)
9-30 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock brake system)............................ 5-52
Aiming control, Headlights ............................... 2-26
Air bag system, Front passenger air bag and
status light ...................................................... 1-45
Air bag warning labels...................................... 1-51
Air bag warning light ............................... 1-52, 2-15
Air cleaner housing filter .................................. 8-21
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation........................... 4-21
Air conditioner service ...................... 4-21, 4-24
Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-13
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations.......... 4-24, 9-6
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-21
In-cabin microfilter ................................... 4-24
Alarm, How to stop alarm (See vehicle
security system)............................................... 2-19
Alcohol, drugs and driving.................................. 5-7
All-wheel drive (AWD) ....................................... 5-46
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light .................. 2-10
Anchor point locations
Top tether strap ........................................ 1-28
Antenna........................................................... 4-64
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 5-52
Anti-lock brake warning light............................ 2-10
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care ............................. 7-2
Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4
Armrest ............................................................. 1-7
Audible reminders ........................................... 2-17
Audio operation precautions ............................ 4-27
Audio system................................................... 4-25
Steering wheel audio controls ................... 4-40
Autochanger
Compact Disc (CD)..................................... 4-37
Autolight system.............................................. 2-25
Automatic
Anti-glare inside mirror.............................. 3-30
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-43
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............. 8-15
Drive positioner ........................................ 3-32
Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-14
Seat positioner ......................................... 3-32
Avoiding collision and rollover............................ 5-7
B
Back door (See lift gate) ...................................
Battery ............................................................
Battery saver system .................................
Before starting the engine ................................
Belts (See drive belts) ......................................
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ..............
Booster seats ..................................................
Brake
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....................
3-24
8-17
2-26
5-13
8-19
4-41
1-32
5-52
Brake booster ........................................... 8-24
Brake fluid ................................................ 8-16
Brake pedal check..................................... 8-23
Brake system ............................................ 5-49
Parking brake check .................................. 8-23
Parking brake operation ............................ 5-18
Warning light ............................................ 2-11
Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-45
Brightness control, Instrument panel ............... 2-27
Bulb check/instrument panel ............................. 2-9
Bulb replacement............................................. 8-30
C
Cabin air filter.................................................. 4-24
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ..... 9-2
Car phone or CB radio ...................................... 4-65
Card holder...................................................... 2-39
Cargo (See vehicle loading information)............ 2-39
Cargo net......................................................... 2-39
Catalytic converter
Three way catalyst....................................... 5-3
CD care and cleaning........................................ 4-39
Child restraints ................................................ 1-19
Booster seats............................................ 1-32
Installation on front passenger seat .......... 1-29
Installation on rear seat outboard or
center positions ........................................ 1-21
LATCH system ........................................... 1-26
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-19
Top tether strap ........................................ 1-27
Top tether strap anchor point locations ...... 1-28
Child safety ..................................................... 1-11
Child safety rear door lock.................................. 3-5
Chimes
Audible reminders..................................... 2-17
Seat belt warning light and chime.............. 2-14
Circuit breaker, Fusible link .............................. 8-26
Cleaning exterior and interior ...................... 7-2, 7-4
Clock ............................................................... 2-32
Cold weather driving ........................................ 5-56
Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone
System) ........................................................... 4-47
Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audio
system) ........................................................... 4-37
Compass display ............................................... 2-6
Console box..................................................... 2-38
Control panel buttons (models with navigation
system) ........................................................... 4-12
Control panel buttons (models without
navigation system)............................................. 4-4
Controls
Control panel buttons (display with
navigation system) .................................... 4-12
Control panel buttons (display without
navigation system)...................................... 4-4
Heater and air conditioner controls
(automatic) ............................................... 4-21
Steering wheel audio controls ................... 4-40
Coolant
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant ........................... 8-10
Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-9
Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-5
Cover, Tonneau cover ....................................... 2-40
Cruise control .................................................. 5-22
Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise control
(on ICC system) ............................................... 5-41
Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control
system ............................................................ 5-24
Cup holders ..................................................... 2-35
D
Daytime running light system ........................... 2-27
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch..................................... 2-23
Dimensions and weights .................................. 9-10
Display controls (See control panel buttons),
With navigation system .................................... 4-12
Display controls (See control panel buttons),
Without navigation system ................................. 4-4
Door open warning light ................................... 2-11
Drive belts ....................................................... 8-19
Drive positioner ............................................... 3-32
Driving
Cold weather driving ................................. 5-56
Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-14
On-pavement and off-load driving................ 5-3
Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2
Safety precautions ...................................... 5-8
DVD player, INFINITI mobile entertainment
system ............................................................ 4-55
E
Economy
Fuel .......................................................... 5-45
Emission control information label ................... 9-13
Emission control system warranty .................... 9-26
Engine
Before starting the engine ......................... 5-13
Break-in schedule ..................................... 5-45
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant ........................... 8-10
Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-13
Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-9
Checking engine oil level ........................... 8-11
Coolant temperature gauge ......................... 2-5
Engine block heater................................... 5-57
Engine compartment check locations ........... 8-7
Engine cooling system................................. 8-9
Engine oil.................................................. 8-11
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ...... 9-5
Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5
Engine serial number................................. 9-12
Engine specifications .................................. 9-8
If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-13
Starting the engine.................................... 5-14
Entry/exit function, Automatic drive
positioner ............................................... 3-29, 3-33
Event data recorders ........................................ 9-28
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2
10-2
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
F
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........... 9-12
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter ........................... 8-21
Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-13
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher
switch) ............................................................ 2-28
Flat tire ..................................................... 6-2, 8-41
Flat towing....................................................... 9-24
Floor mat cleaning ............................................. 7-4
Fluid
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............. 8-15
Brake fluid ................................................ 8-16
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Engine coolant ............................................ 8-9
Engine oil.................................................. 8-11
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-15
Window washer fluid ................................. 8-16
FM-AM-Satellite radio with compact disc (CD)
changer ........................................................... 4-34
Fog light switch................................................ 2-28
Front passenger air bag and status light ........... 1-45
Front power seat adjustment .............................. 1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Fuel economy............................................ 5-45
Fuel octane rating........................................ 9-3
Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3
Fuel-filler cap ............................................ 3-26
Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-26
Gauge......................................................... 2-5
Fuses .............................................................. 8-24
Fusible links .................................................... 8-26
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ...................................................... 2-47
Gas cap ........................................................... 3-26
Gauge ............................................................... 2-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge............... 2-5
Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-5
Odometer ................................................... 2-4
Speedometer .............................................. 2-4
Tachometer................................................. 2-4
General maintenance ......................................... 8-2
Glove box ........................................................ 2-36
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth .............. 4-41
Hazard warning flasher switch.......................... 2-28
Head restraints .................................................. 1-6
Headlights
Aiming control .......................................... 2-26
Bulb replacement...................................... 8-31
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-24
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-23
Headphones (See INFINITI mobile
entertainment system) ..................................... 4-58
Heated seats ................................................... 2-29
Heater
Engine block heater................................... 5-57
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ....... 4-21
HomeLink Universal Transceiver ..................... 2-47
Hood
Release..................................................... 3-24
Horn ................................................................ 2-29
I
Ignition knob (Intelligent Key system) .............. 3-14
Ignition switch
(except Intelligent Key system).................. 5-10
(with Intelligent Key system) ..................... 5-12
Automatic transmission models................. 5-14
Key positions ............................................ 5-11
Immobilizer system ......................................... 2-20
In-cabin microfilter .......................................... 4-24
Indicator lights................................................ 2-15
INFINITI advanced air bag system.................... 1-43
INFINITI mobile entertainment system (MES) ... 4-55
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System............... 2-20
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
Engine start...................................... 5-11, 5-13
Inside
Automatic anti-glare mirror........................ 3-30
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .................. 9-27
Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-27
Instrument panel ............................................... 2-2
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system .............. 5-24
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system, Preview
function........................................................... 5-45
Intelligent Key system ....................................... 3-9
Engine starting.......................................... 3-14
Key operating range .................................. 3-16
Key operation............................................ 3-12
Mechanical key and valet key .................... 3-23
10-3
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Operating the engine................................. 3-14
Remote keyless operation ......................... 3-20
Trouble-shooting guide ............................. 3-19
Warning signals ........................................ 3-17
Interior light .................................................... 2-45
Interior light replacement ................................ 8-31
ISOFIX child restraint ...................................... 1-26
J
Jump starting ................................................... 6-10
K
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See
Intelligent Key system).............................. 3-20
Without Intelligent Key system (See remote
keyless entry system) .................................. 3-5
Keys, Except Intelligent Key ............................... 3-2
Keys, For Intelligent Key system ......................... 3-9
L
Labels
Air bag warning labels ............................... 1-51
Air conditioner specification label.............. 9-13
Emission control information label............. 9-13
Engine serial number................................. 9-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-12
Tire and Loading Information label ... 8-36, 9-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ........... 9-11
Lane departure warning (LDW) switch ............... 2-30
Lane departure warning (LDW) system .............. 5-19
LATCH system .................................................. 1-26
License plate, Installing front license plate ....... 9-14
Lift gate ........................................................... 3-24
Light
Air bag warning light ................................. 1-52
Bulb replacement...................................... 8-30
Fog light switch......................................... 2-28
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-24
Headlights bulb replacement..................... 8-31
Indicator lights ......................................... 2-15
Interior light ............................................. 2-45
Replacement............................................. 8-30
Room light ................................................ 2-45
Vanity mirror light ..................................... 2-47
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders ................................................. 2-10
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-23
Lights, Exterior and interior light
replacement .................................................... 8-31
Loading information
(See vehicle loading information)............... 9-15
Lock
Door locks .................................................. 3-3
Glove box lock........................................... 2-36
Lift gate lock ............................................. 3-24
Power door lock .......................................... 3-3
Low fuel warning light ...................................... 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light......................... 2-13
Low tire pressure warning system (See tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .................. 5-3
Luggage floor boxes......................................... 2-39
M
Maintenance
Battery...................................................... 8-17
General maintenance .................................. 8-2
Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-4
Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5
Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2
Outside the vehicle ..................................... 8-3
Seat belt maintenance............................... 1-18
Under the hood and vehicle ......................... 8-4
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)...................... 2-16
Mechanical key (for Intelligent Key system) ...... 3-23
Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner ..... 3-32
Meters and gauges ............................................ 2-3
Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness
control............................................................. 2-27
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror.............. 3-30
Outside mirrors......................................... 3-31
Mobile entertainment system (MES) ................. 4-55
Monitor, Rearview monitor ............................... 4-18
N
Net, Cargo net.................................................. 2-39
New vehicle break-in........................................ 5-45
O
Odometer .......................................................... 2-4
10-4
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ................................................... 9-2
Changing engine oil and filter .................... 8-13
Checking engine oil level ........................... 8-11
Engine oil.................................................. 8-11
Engine oil viscosity...................................... 9-5
On-pavement and off-load driving precautions
(for AWD models) ............................................... 5-3
Operating the engine (Intelligent Key
system) ........................................................... 3-14
Outside mirrors................................................ 3-31
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats .................. 6-13
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information...................................................... 9-29
P
Parking
Brake check .............................................. 8-23
Parking brake operation ............................ 5-18
Parking on hills ......................................... 5-48
Phone
Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ....... 4-41
Car phone or CB radio................................ 4-65
Power
Front seat adjustment.................................. 1-2
Power door lock .......................................... 3-3
Power outlet ............................................. 2-32
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-15
Power steering system .............................. 5-49
Power windows ......................................... 2-41
Pre-tensioner seat belt system ......................... 1-50
Precautions
Audio operation ........................................ 4-27
Braking precautions .................................. 5-49
Child restraints ......................................... 1-19
Cruise control ........................................... 5-22
Driving safety.............................................. 5-8
Lane departure warning (LDW) system........ 5-19
Maintenance............................................... 8-5
On-pavement and off-load driving................ 5-3
Seat belt usage ........................................... 1-8
Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-37
When starting and driving............................ 5-2
Preview function (for Intelligent cruise control
system) ........................................................... 5-45
Push starting ................................................... 6-12
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio................................ 4-65
Steering wheel audio controls ................... 4-40
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test (US only) ................................................... 9-27
Rear center seat belt ........................................ 1-15
Rear door lock
Child safety rear door lock ........................... 3-5
Rear power point.............................................. 2-32
Rear seat adjustment ......................................... 1-4
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch ............................................................. 2-23
Rear window wiper and washer switch.............. 2-22
Rearview monitor ............................................. 4-18
Recorders, Event data ...................................... 9-28
Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-11
Remote controller (See INFINITI mobile
entertainment system) ..................................... 4-56
Remote keyless entry
System, Except Intelligent Key system ......... 3-5
System, For Intelligent Key system ............ 3-20
Reporting safety defects (US only) .................... 9-26
Roadside assistance program............................. 6-2
Rollover............................................................. 5-7
Room light ....................................................... 2-45
Run-flat tires...................................................... 6-3
S
Safety
Child seat belts ......................................... 1-11
Reporting safety defects (US only) ............. 9-26
Towing safety............................................ 9-21
Screen (See INFINITI mobile entertainment
system) ........................................................... 4-57
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2
Rear seat adjustment .................................. 1-4
Seat belt(s)
Child safety............................................... 1-11
Infants ..................................................... 1-11
Injured persons ........................................ 1-12
Larger children.......................................... 1-12
Pre-tensioner seat belt system................... 1-50
Precautions on seat belt usage .................... 1-8
Pregnant women ....................................... 1-12
Rear center seat belt ................................. 1-15
Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5
Seat belt extenders ................................... 1-18
Seat belt maintenance............................... 1-18
10-5
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Seat belt warning light and chime.............. 2-14
Seat belts ................................................... 1-8
Shoulder belt height adjustment................ 1-15
Small children........................................... 1-11
Three-point type with retractor................... 1-12
Seat(s)
Driver-side memory ................................... 3-32
Heated seats............................................. 2-29
Seats .......................................................... 1-2
Security system (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start ....................................... 2-20
Security system, Vehicle security system .......... 2-18
Selector lever, Shift lock release....................... 5-17
Servicing air conditioner ......................... 4-21, 4-24
Shift lock release, Transmission ....................... 5-17
Shifting
Automatic transmission............................. 5-14
Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front
seats ............................................................... 1-15
Snow mode switch ........................................... 2-31
Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-20
Speedometer..................................................... 2-4
Starting
Before starting the engine ......................... 5-13
Jump starting ............................................ 6-10
Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2
Push starting ............................................ 6-12
Starting the engine.................................... 5-14
Status light, Front passenger air bag ................ 1-45
Steering
Power steering fluid .................................. 8-15
Power steering system .............................. 5-49
Steering wheel switch for audio
controls .................................................... 4-40
Tilting telescopic steering column.............. 3-28
Storage ........................................................... 2-34
Storage box ..................................................... 2-35
Sun shade ....................................................... 2-43
Sun visors ....................................................... 3-29
Sunglasses holder ........................................... 2-34
Sunroof ........................................................... 2-43
Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-43
Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-51
Supplemental air bag warning light ......... 1-52, 2-15
Supplemental restraint system......................... 1-37
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system...................................................... 1-37
Switch
Audio control steering wheel switch........... 4-40
Autolight switch ........................................ 2-25
Fog light switch......................................... 2-28
Hazard warning flasher switch ................... 2-28
Headlight aiming control ........................... 2-26
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-24
Ignition switch (except Intelligent Key
system)..................................................... 5-10
Ignition switch (with Intelligent Key
system)..................................................... 5-12
Ignition switch automatic transmission
models ..................................................... 5-14
Lane departure warning (LDW) system........ 2-30
Power door lock switch................................ 3-4
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch....................................................... 2-23
Snow mode switch .................................... 2-31
Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-28
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch.... 2-31
T
Tachometer ....................................................... 2-4
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge............... 2-5
Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System)
Engine start .............................................. 2-20
Three-way catalyst ............................................. 5-3
Tilting telescopic steering column .................... 3-28
Tire
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning
light.......................................................... 2-13
Tires
Flat tire ....................................................... 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system ................ 5-3
Run-flat tires ............................................... 6-3
Spare tire.................................................. 8-45
Tire and Loading information label............. 8-36
Tire and Loading Information label ............ 9-13
Tire chains ................................................ 8-42
Tire dressing ............................................... 7-3
Tire pressure............................................. 8-35
Tire pressure information (display)...... 4-7, 4-15
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2
Tire rotation .............................................. 8-43
Types of tires ............................................ 8-40
Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-25
Wheel/tire size.......................................... 9-10
Wheels and tires ....................................... 8-35
Tonneau cover ................................................. 2-40
Top tether strap child restraints........................ 1-27
Towing
Flat towing ................................................ 9-24
10-6
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-14
Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-19
Towing load/specification chart................. 9-19
Towing safety............................................ 9-21
TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system .............. 5-3
TPMS, Tire pressure warning system................... 6-2
Trailer towing................................................... 9-19
Transceiver, HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ...................................................... 2-47
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............. 8-15
Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-14
Transmission selector lever lock release .... 5-17
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system (See
Intelligent Key system) .................................... 3-20
Transmitter, Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system)...................... 3-5
Traveling or registering your vehicle in another
country............................................................ 9-11
Trouble-shooting guide (for Intelligent Key
system) ........................................................... 3-19
Troubleshooting guide (for Bluetooth
Hands-Free Phone System) ...................... 4-31, 4-54
Troubleshooting guide (for voiceactivated control system) ........................ 4-31, 4-54
Turn signal switch............................................ 2-28
U
Underbody cleaning ........................................... 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading.............................. 9-25
V
Valet key (for Intelligent Key system)................ 3-23
Vanity mirror light ............................................ 2-47
Vehicle
Dimensions and weights ........................... 9-10
Identification number (VIN)....................... 9-11
Loading information .................................. 9-15
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .............. 6-16
Security system ........................................ 2-18
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch.... 2-31
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system........ 5-54
Vehicle electronic systems.................. 4-9, 4-16
Ventilators....................................................... 4-20
Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free
Phone System)................................................. 4-47
W
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............. 1-51
Warning light
Air bag warning light ........................ 1-52, 2-15
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light............ 2-10
Anti-lock brake warning light ..................... 2-10
Brake warning light ................................... 2-11
Door open warning light ............................ 2-11
Low fuel warning light ............................... 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light .................. 2-13
Seat belt warning light and chime.............. 2-14
Warning lights ................................................. 2-10
Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 2-28
Warning, Lane departure warning (LDW)
system ............................................................ 5-19
Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)........................................................ 5-3, 6-2
Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders.......................................................... 2-9
Warranty
Emission control system warranty.............. 9-26
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch ....... 2-22
Windshield wiper and washer switch ......... 2-21
Washing ............................................................ 7-2
Waxing .............................................................. 7-2
Weights (See dimensions and weights)............. 9-10
Wheel/tire size ................................................ 9-10
Wheels and tires .............................................. 8-35
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels.................. 7-3
Window washer fluid........................................ 8-16
Window(s)
Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3
Power windows ......................................... 2-41
Windshield wiper and washer switch ................ 2-21
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer switch ....... 2-22
Rear window wiper blade........................... 8-23
Windshield wiper and washer switch ......... 2-21
Wiper blades............................................. 8-21
X
Xenon headlights............................................. 2-23
10-7
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-8
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-9
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-10
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-11
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-12
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
MEMO
10-13
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
VK45DE engine
In order to maintain engine and exhaust
system durability and performance, unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 96) must
be used.
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but
only under the following precautions:
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially
with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill
up with unleaded premium gasoline as
soon as possible.
O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
VQ35DE engine
10W-40 viscosity oil may be used for
ambient temperatures above 0°F
(−18°C).
CAUTION
O
O
O
Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, since this will damage
the three way catalyst.
Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on E-85
fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel
system components and is not covered by
the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.
For additional information, see “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
section.
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
For improved vehicle performance,
INFINITI recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 91 AKI number (Research octane
number 96).
O API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving
For VK45DE engine
O API Certification Mark
O ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for
all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,
For VQ35DE engine
O API Certification Mark
O API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I
& II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving
O ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III
O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for
all ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,
10W-40 viscosity oil may be used for
ambient temperatures above 0°F
(−18°C).
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil
and oil filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the inside of the rear left door
opening.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations
outlined in the “Break-in schedule” infor-
Z 05.11.2/S50-D/V5.0 X
mation found in the “5. Starting and
driving” section of this Owner’s Manual.
Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X
1. Engine oil (P.8-11)
2. Brake fluid (P.8-16)
3. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)
4. Hood release (P.3-24)
5. Lift gate (P.3-24)/Fuel-filler door release (P.3-26)
6. Seat belt (P.1-8)
7. Door lock/key (P.3-3)
8. Spare tire (P.6-2, P.8-43)
9. Windshield washer fluid (P.8-16)
10. Engine coolant (P.8-9)
11. Power steering fluid (P.8-15)
12. Battery (P.8-17)
13. Audio system (P.4-25)/Heater and air
conditioner (P.4-21)
14. Fuel (P.3-26, P.9-2)
STI0356
Z 05.11.1/S50-D/V5.0 X